Sei sulla pagina 1di 168

Doc.

Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 1 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

Operation Manual

ST300 Series / ST340 Series

Suntech International Ltd.

CONFIDENTIAL DOCUMENT
This document belongs to intellectual property of Suntech
International Ltd. and shall neither be copied nor be given to any
3rd parties without prior written consent from the company.
DO NOT MAKE ANY COPIES

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 2 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

Table of Contents

1. Introduction ........................................................................................................................................ 7
2. Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 9
2-1. Operation modes ......................................................................................................................... 9
2-2. Reports sent by device................................................................................................................ 9
2-3. Parameter change...................................................................................................................... 10
2-4. Features ..................................................................................................................................... 10
3. Communication String Format ........................................................................................................ 12
3-1. Command format ....................................................................................................................... 12
3-2. Report Format ............................................................................................................................ 12
4. Configuration ................................................................................................................................... 13
4-1. Network parameters .................................................................................................................. 14
4-2. Reporting parameters ............................................................................................................... 16
4-3. Event Parameters ...................................................................................................................... 18
4-4. GSM Parameters for SMS messaging / phone calling............................................................. 25
4-5. Parameters for various features ............................................................................................... 26
4-6. Voltage control parameters ...................................................................................................... 28
4-7. Motion sensor parameters ........................................................................................................ 29
4-8. Circular geo-fencing parameters .............................................................................................. 30
4-9. Additional Parameters (TCP/UDP Parameters) ........................................................................ 30
4-10. New parameter setting ............................................................................................................ 33
4-11. Telemetry parameters.............................................................................................................. 36
4-12. Driver ID parameters ............................................................................................................... 38
4-12-1. How to add Driver ID ............................................................................................................................. 38
4-12-2. How to remove Driver ID ...................................................................................................................... 39
4-12-3. How to get Drive ID ............................................................................................................................... 39
4-13. How to set Driver Pattern Analysis parameters..................................................................... 40
4-14. Vehicle Engine Information ..................................................................................................... 41
4-14-1. How to Set Parameters for Engine Event ........................................................................................... 41
4-14-2. How to Get ECU Command Parameters ............................................................................................. 42
4-14-3. Requesting Information about ECU (or ECM) by J1939 .................................................................... 43
4-15. LATAM (Latin America) parameters ....................................................................................... 44
4-16. Polygon geo-fence parameters............................................................................................... 46
4-16-1. How to set polygon geo-fence for each group .................................................................................. 46
4-16-2. How to set Polygon Service ................................................................................................................. 49
4-16-3. How to get Information about Polygon Group .................................................................................. 50
4-16-4. How to get Information about Positions of the Polygon Group ........................................................ 50
4-16-5. How to erase Polygon Group ........................................................................................................... 51
4-16-6. How to get information about Polygon Service ................................................................................ 51
4-17. Temperature parameter ........................................................................................................... 51
4-18. Coin Machine Parameter ......................................................................................................... 52
5. Tracking and route deviation parameters ...................................................................................... 54
5-1. Start/Stop tracking ..................................................................................................................................... 54
5-2. How to set tracking positions ................................................................................................................... 54
5-3. Number of tracking positions ................................................................................................................... 55
6. Reporting to server .......................................................................................................................... 57
6-1. Status Report ............................................................................................................................. 58
Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document
Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 3 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

6-1-1. Normal ...................................................................................................................................................... 60


6-1-2. Zip ............................................................................................................................................................. 65
6-2. Emergency Report ..................................................................................................................... 68
6-2-1. Normal ...................................................................................................................................................... 70
6-2-2. Zip ............................................................................................................................................................. 73
6-3. Event Report .............................................................................................................................. 76
6-3-1. Normal ...................................................................................................................................................... 78
6-3-2. Zip ............................................................................................................................................................. 81
6-4. Alert Report ................................................................................................................................ 84
6-4-1. Normal ...................................................................................................................................................... 86
6-4-2. Zip ............................................................................................................................................................. 93
6-5. Travel Event Report ................................................................................................................... 97
6-5-1. Normal ...................................................................................................................................................... 98
6-5-2. Zip ............................................................................................................................................................. 99
6-6. Keep-Alive Report.................................................................................................................... 101
6-6-1. Normal .................................................................................................................................................... 101
6-6-2. Zip ........................................................................................................................................................... 101
6-7. Data Reporting from External RS232 ..................................................................................... 102
6-7-1. Normal .................................................................................................................................................... 102
6-7-2. Zip ........................................................................................................................................................... 103
6-8. Transferring Data to External RS232 Device ......................................................................... 104
6-9. Status String Reporting via SMS ............................................................................................ 105
6-9-1. In case of Back-up method .................................................................................................................. 105
6-9-2. In case of Main method ........................................................................................................................ 108
6-10. Location query sent via smart phone................................................................................... 109
6-11. Coin Machine Report ............................................................................................................. 110
6-11-1. Normal .................................................................................................................................................. 110
6-11-2. Zip ......................................................................................................................................................... 111
6-12. Journey Summary Report ..................................................................................................... 113
6-12-1. Normal .................................................................................................................................................. 113
6-12-2. Zip ......................................................................................................................................................... 114
6-13. Histogram Report .................................................................................................................. 115
6-13-1. Normal .................................................................................................................................................. 115
6-13-2. Zip ......................................................................................................................................................... 116
6-14. Summarized data packet of GPS LOG ................................................................................. 118
6-15. Crash Reconstruction ........................................................................................................... 119
7. Command for General Use ............................................................................................................ 121
7-1. Common parts of this command ............................................................................................ 121
7-2. Requesting Status ................................................................................................................... 121
7-3.Re-setting (Restoring to factory defaults and Rebooting) ..................................................... 121
7-4. Pre-setting ................................................................................................................................ 122
7-5. ACK of Emergency .................................................................................................................. 123
7-6. Enable1 (Activating Output 1) ............................................................................................... 123
7-7. Disable1 (Inactivating Output1) ............................................................................................ 124
7-8. Enable2 (Activating Output 2) ............................................................................................... 124
7-9. Disable2 (Inactivating Output2) ............................................................................................ 124
7-10. Enable3 (Activating Output 3) ............................................................................................. 125
7-11. Disable3 (Inactivating Output3) .......................................................................................... 125
7-12. Requesting IMSI ..................................................................................................................... 125
7-13. Requesting ICCID .................................................................................................................. 125
7-14. Requesting to send information about Device Version ...................................................... 126
7-15.Status Request made by External Device Connected with RS232 of Event Lines ............. 126
Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document
Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 4 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

7-16. AT Commands from RS232 ................................................................................................... 127


7-17. How to start Counting of Odometer Pulse ........................................................................... 127
7-18. How to stop Counting of Odometer Pulse ........................................................................... 127
7-19. Request information about RPM value ................................................................................ 128
7-20. Request information about Odometer value ........................................................................ 128
7-21. Request Driver ID................................................................................................................... 129
7-22. Request to Release Output Control by Driver ID ................................................................. 129
7-23. Request information about telemetry setting parameter .................................................... 129
8. Command for various usages ....................................................................................................... 130
8-1. Command on how to erase all the saved reports Erase All ............................................. 130
8-2. Command on how to set Traveled Distance .......................................................................... 130
8-3. Command on how to initialize Message Number .................................................................. 131
8-4. Command on how to set Hour-Meter ..................................................................................... 131
8-5. Command on how to initialize Circular Geo-fence ................................................................ 131
8-6. Command on how to request data relating to Circular Geo-fence ....................................... 131
8-7. Command on how to request its Own Phone Number .......................................................... 132
8-8. Command on how to set its Own Phone Number ................................................................. 132
8-9. Command on how to request information about Current Volume Level in Call.................. 132
8-10. Command on how to set Volume Level ............................................................................... 133
8-11. Command on how to Reboot ................................................................................................ 133
8-12. Command on how to enable Server Locking ....................................................................... 133
8-13. Command on How to Disable Server Locking ..................................................................... 133
8-14. Command on How to Restart Anti-Theft 2 ........................................................................... 134
8-15. Command on how to set SMS Number for Panic Situation ................................................ 134
8-16.Command on how to request SMS Number Used in Panic Situation ................................. 134
8-17. Command on how to set Google Map Address ................................................................... 135
8-18. Command on how to get Google Map Address ................................................................... 135
8-19. Command on how to do Simultaneous Testing for Output 1 & 2 for 30 seconds ............. 135
8-20. Command on how to Improve Battery Life .......................................................................... 136
8-21. Request information about the Temperature Sensor ID ..................................................... 137
8-22. Request information about the Temperature ....................................................................... 137
8-23. Command on how to set MIC Volume Level ........................................................................ 138
8-24. Command on how to set Horn Pulses. ................................................................................. 138
8-25. Command on how to initialize Over Speed Time. ................................................................ 138
9. Detailed Description on Event Lines and Features ..................................................................... 139
9-1. Total 14-pin Event Lines.......................................................................................................... 139
9-1-1. Immobilizer ............................................................................................................................................ 144
9-1-2. Immobilizer2 ............................................................................................................................................ 144
9-1-3. Alert of Buzzer ....................................................................................................................................... 145
9-2. Indication with Two (2) LEDs .................................................................................................. 146
9-2-1. Red LED for GPS ................................................................................................................................... 147
9-2-2. Blue LED for GPRS ............................................................................................................................... 147
9-2-3. Phone Call LEDs ................................................................................................................................... 148
9-3. Power Saving ........................................................................................................................... 149
9-4.Backup Battery ......................................................................................................................... 149
9-5. Motion Sensor.......................................................................................................................... 150
9-6. Protection of Vehicle Battery .................................................................................................. 151
9-7. Route Deviation ....................................................................................................................... 152
9-8. Anti-Theft ................................................................................................................................. 154
9-9. Storage of Reports un-sent ..................................................................................................... 159
Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document
Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 5 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

9-10. Odometer and RPM Calibration ............................................................................................ 160


9-11. I-button ................................................................................................................................... 161
9-12. Fuel Sensor ............................................................................................................................ 162
9-13. Temperature sensor .............................................................................................................. 164
9-13-1. Product Specification ......................................................................................................................... 164
9-13-2. Product Outside Overview ................................................................................................................. 164
9-13-3. Product Installation ............................................................................................................................ 164
10.Appendices ................................................................................................................................... 165
10-1. How to convert the TEMPERATURE DATA(ZIP DATA) to the Celsius value. .................... 165
Revisions ............................................................................................................................................ 167

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 6 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

Disclaimer
We, at Suntech, announce that this document and all other related products (i.e. device, firmware, and software)
have been developed by the company, Suntech International Ltd., which is hereinafter referred to as Suntech.
The information in this manual is believed to be accurate and reliable at the time of releasing. We, at Suntech, also
assume no responsibility for any damage or loss resulting from the use of this manual, and expressly disclaim any
liability or damages for loss of data, loss of use, and property damage of any kind, direct, incidental or
consequential, in regard to or arising out of the performance or form of the materials presented herein or in any
software program(s) that may accompany this document. When this document is released, it is most compatible
with a specified firmware version. Now that the functionalities of the devices are being developed and improved
continuously from time to time by Suntech, any alteration on the protocol, the firmware functions, the hardware
specifications of the product is subject to change without prior notice.

Copyright
We, at Suntech, notify that Suntech holds all parts of intellectual rights applicable in the copyright laws in all the
countries. The information contained in this document cannot be reproduced in any form without prior written
consent made by Suntech. Any software programs that might accompany this document can be used only in
accordance with any license agreement(s) between the purchaser and Suntech.

Warning
Our customers are required to be aware that connecting the wire inputs can be hazardous to both of the installer
and your vehicles electrical system(s) if not done by an experienced installer. This document assumes you are
aware of the inherent dangers of working in installing the device on the vehicle(s) and the machinery.

Document Amendments

When it comes to the firmware version column with specific firmware number, any amendment(s) on the comments
column should be made on this relevant firmware version (and the versions thereafter). Before applying any
changes made in this protocol, you are required to make sure that you have upgraded the firmware suitable for the
specified version.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 7 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

1. Introduction

The ST300 (or ST340/ST340LC or their variation models such as ST300B, ST300V, ST300R, ST300A, ST300P,
ST300F, ST300H, ST300C, ST300K, ST340LC, etc.) is a vehicle tracking and controlling device. It is designed to
collect location data through GPS technology, various vehicle conditions through event lines, and interact remotely
with its server by using GSM/GPRS technology.

In order to make the vehicle tracking system work, device should be configured and installed properly on a vehicle
whose geographical position and/or state is desired to be remotely monitored and/or controlled.

Following this Introduction Chapter (i.e. Chapter 1.), the Operation Manual is organized as below.

Chapter 2. Overview

This chapter covers fundamental features of the device.

Chapter 3. Communication string format (Command and Report)

This chapter gives descriptions on the two (2) formats, Command (all the formats received by device) and
Report (sent from the device).

Chapter 4. Configuration

This chapter gives users explanation on how and what parameters are required to be set in configuring
device.

This manual describes setting commands which can be sent with following three options;
Option 1: Setting by PC.
Option 2: Setting by GPRS.
Option 3: Setting by SMS.

Practically special program (named as SyncTrak) is used for setting. It enables setting much easier and
multi-setting possible in PC environments.

Chapter 5. Tracking and route deviation parameters

This chapter gives users explanation on how these parameters need to be set if user wants to enable the
device to track moving of vehicle along the routes predefined by the user.

Chapter 6. Reporting to server

This chapter covers when and what reports are sent back to the server by device.

Chapter 7. Command for general use

This chapter describes what commands the server sends to its device.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 8 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

Chapter 8. Commands for various usages

This chapter gives users explanation on what commands can be made in addition to the commands
described in the Chapter 7.

Chapter 9. Detailed description on event lines and special features

This chapter gives users detailed information on key features of the device and on how to operate the device
if the events occur after configuring the parameters related to such events.

Please note that this Operation Manual is for the standard model. In case specific requirements are incorporated into
this Manual, such a manual applies only for the case.

For overall operation including installation, in addition to the Operation Manual, users should refer to other
documents such as Installation Manual, Technical Data Sheet, Firmware OTA (over-the-air) Manual, Buyer Change
Guide, Trace Log, Assembly Guide and so on.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 9 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

2. Overview
Main function of device installed on a vehicle is to report vehicle location and status to its monitoring server at
predefined interval and to deliver command coming from the server for activating any appliance connected to the
device.

2-1. Operation modes

The device works in one of the three (3) operation modes below.

Driving mode:

This mode starts when Ignition of the vehicle is ON.

Parking mode:

This mode is operational when Ignition is OFF for duration longer than the pre-defined time (T1).

In the parking mode, the device can get into special modes for power saving like Sleep mode and Deep
sleep mode. These power saving modes are described in more details in the end of this document.

Emergency mode:

This mode works either when panic button is ON or when one of any predefined events occurs.

2-2. Reports sent by device

There are 7types of report/response sent by device to the server as follows:

Status report (made in string / made in zip),

Status string report (made in string) sent via SMS

Emergency report,

Event report,

Keep-alive report,

Alert (**),

Data report delivered through External RS232

Note (**): In addition to the reports periodically sent to the server as described above, device also sends
some alerts. For instance, device sends the server such an alert if the vehicle moves under the parking
mode or if the connected Input Line is changed.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 10 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

Suntech can also increase this capacity up to a certain level if a customer of the device wants to do so. As soon as
the reporting condition for the device is recovered, the device starts sending all those accumulated reports according
to the following rule:

- Emergency (the most important) Command Response Alert Status Report Alive (the lowest priority)

This means that the emergency report is the first one that should be sent right after the GPRS network condition is
recovered.

2-3. Parameter change

Parameters which have already been set on the device can be changed via GPRS or via SMS or via RS232
connected with PC/ST50if a user needs to do so. Some controlling functions can also be implemented in the same
way.

How to change values of the current parameters is described in detail in Chapter 4 of this document.

2-4. Features

Key features of the ST300 device are as follows:

- Power Saving Modes (Power Down Modes)


There are two kinds of power saving mode such as Sleep and Deep Sleep mode.
Please refer to 9-3. Power Saving

- LED Indicators

The LEDs indicate GPRS and GPS status. It is helpful to check what error(s) and why such an error has
occurred.

- Event Lines

Device has 2 output lines, 3 input lines and one ignition line.
** The ST300F uses the <OUTPUT2> line to control power for the fuel sensor(s).

- Upgrading Firmware by Over The Air (Firmware OTA)

In case firmware of the device has an (some) error(s) or needs to be upgraded to provide the user with newly
implemented services, the device can upgrade its internal ROM file by over the air (Firmware OTA), remotely
via GPRS. The users do not need to visit the vehicle individually to download the new firmware on those
vehicles.
How to do OTA is described in detail in the SunTech_OTA_UA_Protocol document.

- Parking Lock

Device is able to check if the vehicle moves away from the pre-defined parking boundary or starts moving
without having a mode of the ignition on. In case the device recognizes such an unauthorized moving or driving,
it sends an emergency report immediately.

- Over-Speed

Device checks speed of the vehicle and sends to the server an alert if the vehicle runs faster than the
predefined over-speed threshold values.

- Checking Connectivity of GPS Antenna


Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document
Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 11 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

Device alerts when GPS antenna is disconnected. It is applicable only to the device models which have the
external antenna.

- Checking Status of Main Power Source

Device recognizes its connectivity with the main power source (i.e. vehicles battery) and is able to inform the
server about status on whether or not the main power line is disconnected. The device is also able to inform
the server about the voltage level status of the main power source and informs the server in case the voltage
level of the main power source drops down below the pre-set value. This function is applicable to battery-
installed device models only.

- Alerting Battery Error

Device sends an alert when a battery charging error occurs. This function is applicable only to the device
models available with back-up battery.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 12 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

3. Communication String Format


All the communication messages exchanged between device and its server should be in the form of STRING as
described below. Each Report can be compressed in ZIP. Every Field is separated with semicolon. All the report
string triggered by device ends with a mark, r (0x0d).

3-1. Command format

The following format is used when the server sends command message to the device(s) as shown in the below table.
The Value (or Indicating Mark) and its Meaning are described individually.

The parts consisting of Fields are capitalized for naming like:

HDR stands for the header, DEV_ID for device identification number, VER for version, Field 1, Field 2, etc.

HDR DEV_ID VER Field 1 Field 2 Field n

Field Value (or Mark) Meaning


HDR String ST300 + Command type.
DEV_ID 9 char Device ID.
VER 02 Protocol Version. This is fixed with 02.
Field 1 ~ n String Contents.

The Device ID(consisting of9digits)is a unique number that each device should have. It is equal to the last 9 digits
of IMEI numbers shown on the back label of the device. Whenever the server sends a command message, it
designates a specific device along with the unique identification number of the device as a command receiver. And
then, the device recognizes a fact that it has received the command message and responds to the server with a
relevant response or a relevant action to be taken. This is how a normal communication is made between the server
and its device.

On the other hand, sometimes, a very bad GPRS connection between a device and the server may consequently
bring about a bad result that the specified command message would be delivered NOT to the targeted device BUT
to other device. In such a situation, the wrong device does not accept the command message because the device
ID number of the message does not match the ID number of the wrong device.

However, we might consider a situation in which a command message is delivered to a device via RS232. In such a
situation the device accepts the command message even though the device ID number of that command message
is NOT its own one.

3-2. Report Format

The contents of the following table show what messages and how they are delivered to the server in response to the
command that the server has sent to the device(s) by requesting the device(s) to respond with.

HDR DEV_ID SW_VER Field 1 Field 2 Field n

Field Value (or Mark) Meaning


HDR String ST300 + Report type.
DEV_ID 9 char Device ID.
VER 001 Software version that the device has.
Field 1 ~ n String Contents.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 13 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

4. Configuration

Before a device starts being operated, its parameters should be set first. This chapter shows the string to be sent to
device.

There are 3 options of sending string.

Option 1: by using PC.


Option 2: by using GSM/GPRS network.
Option 3: by messaging via SMS.

In practice, configuration can be made more efficiently with SyncTrak, i.e. a setting tool provided by Suntech.

Once a device receives a command from the server, it gets back to the server with a relevant response. Device also
changes some parameters (if it is required to do so) or takes an action as instructed below as per the command sent
by the server.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 14 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

4-1. Network parameters

The following table shows how and what parameters are required to be set so that the device can be connected with
network. As shown in the bottom part of this table, an <Example> of [command] and [response]are made in string
respectively when the configuration for the networking is completed.

HDR DEV_ID VER AUTH APN USER_ID USER_PWD SEVER_IP SEVER_PORT

B_SEVER_IP B_SEVER_IP SMS_NO PIN_NO

Field Marks Value Meaning


HDR ST300NTW Command type of Header.
DEV_ID 9 char Device ID.
VER 02 Protocol Version.
AUTH 0/1/A GPRS authentication:

0: PAP(NO in SyncTrak).
1: CHAP(YESinSyncTrak).
A: Automatic GPRS set.
In this case, parameters for APN, USER_ID and
USER_PWD field should remain empty.
APN String Access Point Name.
USER_ID String ID for GPRS Access.
USER_PWD String Password for GPRS Access.
SEVER_IP String Server IP Address.
SEVER_PORT String Server Port.
B_SEVER_IP String IP Address of Backup Server.
B_SEVER_PORT String Port of Backup Server.
SMS_NO String Phone number that will receive the SMS report sent by the
device.

This can be used for backup in the area where GPRS


condition is not good. Or, it can be used as a main report
receiver when IP and Port are unavailable.If it is not used, it
should remain empty.
PIN_NO String PIN Number to release PIN lock if it is enabled.
<Example>

[command] ST300NTW;100850000;02;0;internet;;;111.111.111.111;8600;;;;
[response] ST300NTW;Res;100850000;010;0;internet;;; 111.111.111.111;8600;;;;
ST300NTW;Res;100850000;010;A1;tim.br;tim;tim; 111.111.111.111;8600;;;;

<Note>:
** If network does not require User ID and Password, these fields should remain empty.

Automatic Setting for GPRS Network

If you set the device to Automatic GPRS Set, the device will automatically set the parameters for GPRS with the
data available on the inserted SIM card.
For instance, if Airtel SIM is inserted, the device will set AUTH to 0, APN to airtelgprs.com, USER_ID and
USER_PASS to empty respectively.
And then, the device reports response string after adding real GPRS parameters, if Automatic GPRS Set is
selected.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 15 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

DNS
SERVER_IP and B_SERVER_IP field can be filled with direct IP address (for example 111.111.111.111) or
domain name (for example, suntechint.com). If this field is written by domain, the device will find real IP address
by DNS and sends reports to IP address.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 16 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

4-2. Reporting parameters

Device responds to the command(s) with the relevant report or response periodically at a time interval or at a travelled
distance interval of the vehicle that has already been predefined by user. Such are response sent back to the server
includes SMS message (if the device user has already configured SMS messaging functionality). The following table
shows how to set those parameters.

In bottom part of the table, the following table also shows how and what parameters should be set to utilize functions
like:

Angle Report, that is used for displaying the historic path more accurately or saving network cost while the
vehicle is driving on straight roads for long time.

FIFO or LIFO, should be selected to determine a sequential order if buffer of the device is completely full
of reports. For more information, take a look at the description made in the bottom part of the table below.

HDR DEV_ID VER T1 T2 T3 A1 SND_DIST T4 SMS_T1 SMS_T2 SMS_PACK_NO

Field Marks Value Meaning


HDR ST300RPT Command type.
DEV_ID 9 char Device ID.
VER 02 Protocol Version.
T1 String Sec Interval to be set to send a Status Report in parking mode:

Range: 0 ~ 86400.
If 0, a report in parking will be sent only one time when vehicle
starts being parked.
T2 String Sec Interval to be set to send a Status Report in driving mode:

Range: 0 ~ 60000.

If 0, a report in driving will be sent only one time when vehicle


starts driving.
T3 String Sec Interval to be set to send a Status Report in emergency mode:

Range: 0 ~ 9999.

If 0, an emergency report will be sent only one time when an


emergency state occurs.
A1 String Number of attempts to send an emergency report until the
device gets acknowledgement from the server:

If 0, no Emergency Report will be sent.

If 65500, unlimited report until get ACK from Server.


SND_DIST String Meter Distance interval to be set when the device sends a Status
Report:

Range: 0 ~ 60000 (60km).

If 0, a Status Report on traveled distance is disabled.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 17 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

If not 0, a Status Report is sent when traveled distance


reaches the predefined SND_DIST.
T4 String Sec Interval to be set to send the Keep Alive string.
SMS_T1 String Min Interval to be set to send a Status Report in parking mode.
SMS_T2 String Min Interval to be set to send a Status Report in driving mode.
SMS_PACK_NO String Report No in one SMS message.
<Example>

[command] ST300RPT;100850000;02;180;120;60;3;0;0;0;0;0
[response] ST300RPT;Res;100850000;010;180;120;60;3;0;0;0;0;0

<Note>:

** If a reporting interval is set with a big number, the network may disconnect GPRS connection because GPRS
communication does not make a progress for a long time. So, the device may not receive the command via GPRS.
T4 will be used to prevent such a disconnection by sending a short data for short time.

** The Keep Alive report is sent only when the device has no data to be sent for the time of the interval T4.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 18 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

4-3. Event Parameters

In order to set these parameters properly, read carefully the contents and <Example> along with <Note> described
in the bottom inside the table below.

HDR DEV_ID VER IGNITION T1 T2

IN1_TYPE IN2_TYPE IN3_TYPE IN1_CHAT IN2_CHAT IN3_CHAT

OUT1_TYPE OUT2_TYPE OUT1_ACTIVE OUT2_ACTIVE

PULSE1_NO PULSE1_ON PULSE1_OFF PULSE2_NO PULSE2_ON PULSE2_OFF

IN4_TYPE IN5_TYPE IN4_CHAT IN5_CHAT BAUD

Field Marks Value Meaning


HDR ST300EVT Command type.
DEV_ID 9 char Device ID.
VER 02 Protocol Version.
IGNITION 0 ~ 3 Ignition using state:

0: Not use ignition.


1: Use ignition Line.
2: Virtual ignition (power).
3: Virtual ignition (motion).
T1 String Sec Delay in entering Parking mode after Ignition goes to OFF.
T2 String Sec Delay in entering Active mode after Ignition goes to ON.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 19 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

IN1_TYPE 0 ~ 15 0 = Falling Edge.


1 = Rising Edge.
2 = Both Edge (Falling & Rising).
3 = Panic Button.
4 = Call1 Button.
5 = Call2 Button.
6 = Reserved.
7 = Anti-Theft Button.
11 = Door Sensor.
13 = Disable Immobilizer if its activated by Jammer Detector.

15 = Anti-Theft Button 2.
Default = 3.

In case of ST300A , ST300H:


17 = Hmeter (For more details about Hmeter, please refer to
the Note written on the bottom of this table.)

In case the FW of ST300B supports the Coin Machine


function:

16 = Use Coin Machine


17 = Speaker Volume Up Button

Only the device that includes voice option (audio circuit) can
be set to Call1 Button or Call2 Button.
IN2_TYPE 0 ~ 15 / 18 ST300P
14 = TPS (It works on ST300P, if the parameter is fixed to
the Input2)
ST300V
14 = TLS (It works on ST300V, if the parameter is fixed to
the Input2)

18 = I-Button (It works only in ST300H and ST300A, if the


parameter is fixed to the input 2.).

Default = 2.
Only the device that includes voice option (audio circuit) can
be set to Call1 Button or Call2 Button.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 20 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

IN3_TYPE 0 ~ 15 In case of 300V, 300R, 300A, 300F, 300H, 300C, 300K :

0 = Falling Edge.
1 = Rising Edge.
2 = Both Edge (Falling & Rising).
3 = Panic Button.
4 = Call1 Button.
5 = Call2 Button.
6 = ADC.
7 = Anti-Theft Button.
11 = Door Sensor.

13 = Disable Immobilizer if its activated by Jammer Detector.

15 = Anti-Theft Button 2.
Default = 2.

Only the device that includes voice option (audio circuit) can
be set to Call1 Button or Call2 Button.

In case of ST300P and ST300V,

ST300P
14 = TPS (It works on ST300P, if the parameter is fixed to
the Input2)
ST300V
14 = TLS (It works on ST300V, if the parameter is fixed to
the Input2)

In case of 300A , 300H


17 = Hmeter (For more detail, please refer to Note written
on the bottom of this table.

Others :
Same as IN1_TYPE.
Default = 2.
IN1_CHAT String 100ms Input1 chattering time:
Range: 0 ~ 9999.
Default = 3 sec.

If 0, Input1 is not checked.

You should set this value to 1, if Input1 Type is set to Use


Coin Machine.
IN2_CHAT String 100ms Input2 chattering time:
Range: 0 ~ 9999.
Default = 2 sec.

If 0, the input2 is not checked.


IN3_CHAT String 100ms Input3 chattering time:
Range: 0 ~ 9999.
Default = 2 sec.
If 0, the input3 should not be set.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 21 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

OUT1_TYPE 0 ~ 5 / 0 = GPIO.
8 ~ 9 1 = immobilizer.
2 = Immobilizer & Auto active.
Auto Active means that immobilizer is activated
automatically when the vehicle starts being parked.

3 = Pulse.
4 = LED Out for indicating Call Status. Refer to 9-2-3 of this
document for more detail.

5 = Buzzer.
8 = Immobilizer 2.
9 = Auto Immobilizer 2.
OUT2_TYPE 0 ~ 5 / Same as OUT1_TYPE.
8 ~ 9
In case of 300F
OUT2_TYPE shall be set as GPIO.
OUT1_ACTIVE 0 or 1 0 = Open when out1 is active.
1 = GND when out1 is active.
OUT2_ACTIVE 0 or 1 0 = Open when out2 is active.
1 = GND when out2 is active.

In case of 300F
OUT2_ACTIVEshall be set to 1.
PULSE1_NO String Pulse number when the out1 type is set to pulse:

Range: 0 ~ 9999.
If Pulse Number is 9999, pulsing runs permanently.
PULSE1_ON String 100ms Active time of Pulse1:

Range: 0 ~ 9999.
It should be set with an even number.
PULSE1_OFF String 100ms Inactive time of Pulse1:

Range: 0 ~ 9999.
It should be set with an even number.
PULSE2_NO String Pulse number when out2 type set to pulse:

Range: 0 ~ 9999.
If Pulse Number is 9999, pulsing runs permanently.
PULSE2_ON String 100ms Active time of pulse2:

Range: 0 ~ 9999.
It should be set with an even number.
PULSE2_OFF String 100ms Inactive time of Pulse2:

Range: 0 ~ 9999.
It should be set with an even number.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 22 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

IN4_TYPE 0 ~ 15 In case of ST300P:


Or
9 14 = TPS (works only in ST300P, fixed in the input2)
Case that an extra event IN4is available:
Same as IN1_TYPE.
Case that an extra event IN4 is not available:
IN4_TYPE should be 9.
9 = No Use.
IN5_TYPE 0 ~ 15 In case of ST300P:
Or 14 = TPS (works only in ST300P, fixed in the input2)
9

In case that an extra event IN5 can be supported :

Same as IN1_TYPE.

In case that an extra event IN5 is not available:


IN5_TYPE should be 9.
9 = No Use.
IN4_CHAT String Chattering time when an extra event IN4is available:

Range: 0 ~ 9999.
If 0, Input 4 is not checked.
When the extra event IN4 is not available, it should be 0.
IN5_CHAT String Chattering time when extra event IN5 is available:

Range: 0 ~ 9999.
If 0, Input 5 is not checked.
When an extra event IN5 is not available, it should be 0.
BAUD 0 ~ 6 It is available when RS232 is supported for extra events.

The following numbers (0 to 6) show their Baud-rates


accordingly as shown below.

0 = No use.
1 = 4800bps.
2 = 9600bps.
3 = 19200bps.
4 = 38400bps.
5 = 115200bps.
6 = 2400bps.

If the device does not support RS232, it should be 0.

Dont use the software flow control, if you use RS232.

In case of ST300F

BAUD shall be set to 2 (9600bps).


<Example>
[command] ST300EVT;100850000;02;1;60;0;3;2;2;30;20;20;1;0;1;0;0;0;0;0;0;0;0;0;0;0;0
[response] ST300EVT;Res;100850000;010;1;60;0;3;2;2;30;20;20;1;0;1;0;0;0;0;0;0;0;0;0;0;0;0

<Note>:
Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document
Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 23 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

** If IGNITION is set to 0, the device doesnt check driving or parking state of the vehicle. It always reports status
string under parking mode, and cannot support Parking Lock and the Service which enters Sleep or Deep Sleep
automatically when the vehicle is parked.

** If IGNITION is set to 2, the device checks if it is in driving status or in parking status of the vehicle with voltage
range of vehicles battery. We named it as Virtual Ignition by power. Virtual ignition by power runs when the
device is installed on a real vehicle and it may need to adjust the voltage range for special vehicle. For setting
method, please refer to4-6 of this document.

** In case of pulse, pulse time may have tolerance about dozens of ms.

**Immobilizer, LED Blink line and Buzzer type cannot set both OUT1 and OUT2 simultaneously.

** In a case that an event is set to door sensor, the Active State means that the door is open.

** Explanation about HMETER Function:

The accumulated time of driving (named as HMETER) is written in the string of the report that the device sends
to its server. Normally, HMETER is counted while the vehicle is driven (when the ignition line is on).

If you want to utilize the functionality of HMETER under specific conditions, , you should set an input line to
HMETER for specifying those driving conditions.

Here is an example of how and in what situation you can utilize function of the HMETER input:

There might be a user of a GPS device who wants to know for how long time a companys vehicle (which is
equipped with a GPS device) has been driven for the purpose of the company. However, sometimes, this
vehicle might be used for other purpose. It means that driving time of this vehicle can be categorized by 2 cases
as follows:
.

Case A

Case B
the driver personally wanted to use the vehicle for his family not for the company.

The device models (i.e. only 3 models such as ST300A, ST300H and ST300K) of Suntech are able to measure
the driving time of Case A if device model was already configured properly by using a parameter, which is
HMETER.

The device can send its server a report to inform the user about how many hours the vehicle has been driven in
Case A if the device was already configured with the HMETER Parameter. To utilize the function of
HMETER properly, the vehicle should be equipped with a control switch for the HMETER function and the
driver:

should turn the switch on when he starts to drive, and


should turn the switch off when he finishes driving

Data of the <Driving time of Case A> is included in the string of the report that the device sends its server.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 24 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

How does the device check the number of driving hours of Case A?

Step 1. User should configure the device by setting one of 3 Inputs (i.e. Input 1, Input2 and Input3) of
HMETER Parameter.

Step 2. If user of the device wants to use the function of HMETER in driving the vehicle, he should
turn on the switch to control the function.

Step 3. The device calculates the number of the driving hours of Case A not by utilizing Ignition
Line, but by sensing Ground Line of the Input which was already set to make HMETER function.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 25 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

4-4. GSM Parameters for SMS messaging / phone calling

In order to set these parameters properly, read carefully the contents and <Example> along with <Note> described
in the bottom inside the table below.

HDR DEV_ID VER SMS_LOCK SMS_MT1 SMS_MT2 SMS_MT3

SMS_MT4 IN_CALL_LOCK CALL_MT1 CALL_MT2 CALL_MT3 CALL_MT4 CALL_MT5

CALL_MO1 CALL_MO2

Field Marks Value Meaning


HDR ST300GSM Command type.
DEV_ID 9 char Device ID.
VER 02 Protocol Version.
SMS_LOCK 0 or 1 Lock of Receiving Commands by SMS

Disable (0) / Enable (1)

If enabled, only the commands which have been received


from SMS_MT1 ~ MT4, their number(s) can be accepted.
SMS_MT1 String Up to 20 char. Phone number for SMS commands.
SMS_MT2 String Up to 20 char. Phone number for SMS commands.
SMS_MT3 String Up to 20 char. Phone number for SMS commands.
SMS_MT4 String Up to 20 char. Phone number for SMS commands.
IN_CALL_LOCK 0 or 1 Lock of Incoming Call

Disable (0) / Enable (1).

If enabled, only a call which have been received from


CALL_MT1 ~ MT5 numbers can be accepted.
CALL_MT1 String Up to 20 char. Phone number for calling.
CALL_MT2 String Up to 20 char. Phone number for calling.
CALL_MT3 String Up to 20 char. Phone number for calling.
CALL_MT4 String Up to 20 char. Phone number for calling.
CALL_MT5 String Up to 20 char. Phone number for calling.
CALL_MO1 String Up to 20 char. Phone number for outgoing call from device.
CALL_MO2 String Up to 20 char. Phone number for outgoing call from device.
<Example>
[command] ST300GSM;100850000;02;0;;;;;0;;;;;;;
[response] ST300GSM;Res;100850000;010;0;;;;;0;;;;;;;

<Note>
** When SMS or Call numbers are not set, that field should be empty.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 26 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

4-5. Parameters for various features

In order to set these various parameters properly, read carefully the contents and <Example> along with <Note>
described in the bottom inside the table below. In setting a new device, the SyncTrak will show you detailed
explanation on how to set parameters relating to these Fields.

HDR DEV_ID VER PARKING_LOCK SPEED_LIMIT PWR_DN CON_TYPE

ZIP GROUP_SEND MP_CHK ANT_CHK BAT_CHK M_SENSOR CALL


FUEL_SENSOR FUEL_LV_ALT
GEO_FENCE DATA_LOG
(ST300F Only) (ST300F Only)

Field Marks Value Meaning


HDR ST300SVC Command type.
DEV_ID 9 char Device ID.
VER 02 Protocol Version.
PARKING_LOCK 0 or 1 Parking lock

Disable (0) / Enable (1):

If enable (1), the device periodically checks vehicle position


under parking status. When the vehicle gets out from some
boundaries or starts moving faster than the predefined
velocity, the device reports the Parking Lock Emergency.
SPEED_LIMIT String km/h Over speed limit

If 0, the device does not check the over-speed.

If greater than 0 and if the vehicle runs faster than the


predefined value, the device reports an alert once.
PWR_DN 0 ~ 2 Power saving type

0: Disabled sleep and deep sleep service.


1: Enabled deep sleep.
2: Enabled sleep.
CON_TYPE 0 ~ 1 Connection Type with Server

0 = KEEP_CON.
1 = KEEP_DISCON.

Detailed explanation is made below.


ZIP 0 or 1 Use Zip
Disable (0) / Enable (1)
GROUP_SEND 0 or 1 Group Send for stored data

0: Disable.
1: Enable, One packet can include up to 5 normal reports

The Group Send function is explained as below.


MP_CHK 0 or 1 Checking Main Power Disconnection:
Disable (0) / Enable (1).
ANT_CHK 0 or 1 GPS Antenna Connection Error Check:
Disable (0) / Enable (1).

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 27 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

BAT_CHK 0 or 1 Backup Battery Error Check:


Disable (0) / Enable (1).
M_SENSOR 0~7 Motion Sensor:
Motion Collision Shock
0 Disable Disable Disable
1 Enable Disable Disable
2 Disable Disable Enable
3 Enable Disable Enable
4 Disable Enable Disable
5 Enable Enable Disable
6 Disable Enable Enable
7 Enable Enable Enable
CALL 0 or 1 Support Call with headset:
Disable (0) / Enable (1).
GEO_FENCE 0 or 1 Support Geo-fence:
Disable (0) / Enable (1).
DAT_LOG 0 or 1 This parameter is not used now.
But you can get all the stored data log from the device by
using the SyncDown program and Setting cable.

FUEL_SENSOR 0~3 Select the fuel sensor type.


(ST300F Only) 0: No use
1: ESMUS01
2: DS1309
3: Omnicomm
FUEL_LV_ALT 0~2000 Millimeter Value of changing fuel level for ALT report.
(ST300F Only) or or
0~4095 raw value
<Example>
[command] ST300SVC;100850000;02;1;120;0;0;0;0;1;1;1;0;0;0;0;2;100
[response] ST300SVC;Res;100850000;010;1;120;0;0;0;0;1;1;1;0;0;0;0;2;100

<Note>:

** Function of M_SENSOR can be used with the model that has motion sensor.
If shock or collision detection is enabled and if there is shock or collision on the vehicle, the device sends a report
to the server.

** If these parameters are customized for your device, please follow the instructions customized for you instead
of using this table.

CON_TYPE

1. KEEP_CON: Device always keeps TCP connection and can receive a command via GPRS.
2. KEEP_DISCON: Device maintains TCP connection while the device is sending the data to the server.
Within 3 minutes after sending all the data that the device has been keeping, the device disconnects
GPRS and TCP connection as there is no data to be sent any more inside the device. In this case, the
device cannot receive a command via GPRS.

Group Send
Device stores data if the vehicle is in no GPRS area. And, the vehicle moves to GPRS available area, device
starts sending the stored normal data.
If the Group Send option is enabled, the device sends the server 5 reports at one time as one bundle.
The Group Send is useful to speed up sending.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 28 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

M_Sensor
Shock: Device sends an Alert report when ignition is OFF

LOG Data
When you run the SyncDown program, please set the port to USB and click Download in order to
store the data in your PC

FUEL_LV_ALT
This value is for ALT reports when the fuel level is changed fast.
If the fuel level is decreased upper FUEL_LV_ALT, ST300F sends ALT 73 report.
If the fuel level is increased upper FUEL_LV_ALT, ST300F sends ALT 80 report (Omnicomm sensor
only).
4-6. Voltage control parameters

In order to set these parameters properly, read carefully the contents and <Example> along with <Note> described
in the bottom inside the table below. In setting a new device, the SyncTrak will give you detailed explanation on how
to set parameters relating to these Fields.

HDR DEV_ID VER CHR_STOP_THRES_12 CHR_STOP_THRES_24 DECIDE_BAT_24

OPERATION_STOP_THRES_12 OPERATION_STOP_THRES_24 IGNDET_H IGNDET_L

Field Marks Meaning


HDR ST300MBV Command type.
DEV_ID 9 char Device ID.
VER 02 Protocol Version.
CHR_STOP_THRES_12 String Not used.
CHR_STOP_THRES_24 String Not used.
DECIDE_BAT_24 String Voltage value to check if the vehicles battery is 12V or
24V.
OPERATION_STOP_THRES_12 String Voltage value to protect vehicle battery:

In case of 12V vehicle, the device stops operation if car


battery voltage gets lower than this value.
OPERATION_STOP_THRES_24 String Voltage value to protect vehicle:

In case of 24V vehicle, the device stops operation if car


battery voltage gets lower than this value.
In case of virtual ignition, the vehicle can recognize driving
state when vehicle power is higher than IGNDET_H.
IGNDET_H String
Default = 0.
IGNDET_L String In case of virtual ignition, the vehicle can recognize parking
state when vehicle power is less than IGNDET_L.

Default = 0.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 29 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

<Example>
[command] ST300MBV;100850000;02;0;22;19;8.00;18.00;0;0
[response]ST300MBV;Res;100850000;122;0;22;19;8.00;18.00;0;0

<Note>
1. IGNDET_H and IGNDET_L are 0, device check parking and driving automatically.

2. CHR_STOP_THRES_12 and CHR_STOP_THRES_24 parameters are not used in ST300/ST340. Charging is


stopped every time when vehicle mode is changed into Parking.

4-7. Motion sensor parameters

In order to set these parameters properly, read carefully the contents and <Example> along with <Note> described
in the bottom inside the table below. In setting a new device, the SyncTrak will give you detailed explanation on how
to set parameters relating to these Fields.

HDR DEV_ID VER SHOCK_DELAY MOTION_THRES SHOCK_THRES

COLL_THRES

Field Marks Value Meaning


HDR ST300MSR Command type.
DEV_ID 9 char Device ID.
VER 02 Protocol Version.
SHOCK_DELAY String Sec. Delay in entering shock detection mode after ignition off:
0 Disable.
Range: 1 ~ 21600 (5hour).
Recommend: 600 (10 min).
MOTION_THRES String Step Detection level of motion violation:
Range: 0.04 ~ 2.0.
Recommend: 0.04.
SHOCK_THRES String Step Detection level of shock violation:
Range: 0.04 ~ 2.0.
Recommend: 0.04.
COLL_THRES String Step Gravity for collision report.
Range : 0.1 ~ 2.0
Recommend : 0.7
<Example>
[command] ST300MSR;100852588;02;600;0.04;0.04;0.7
[response] ST300MSR;Res;100852588;128;600;0.04;0.04;0.70

<Note>
* As for the shock level, it is recommended that the user should set to 0.04. If the motion threshold is higher than
0.04, the sensor will be too sensitive to make a proper detection on shock.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 30 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

4-8. Circular geo-fencing parameters

This table shows how a device user can set parameters for circular geo-fencing. In order to set these parameters
properly, read carefully the contents and <Example> along with <Note> described in the bottom inside the table
below. In setting a new device, the SyncTrak will show you detailed explanation on how to set parameters relating
to these Fields.

HDR DEV_ID VER GEO_ID ACTIVE LAT LON RADIUS IN OUT

Field Marks Value Meaning


HDR ST300CGF Command type.
DEV_ID 9 char Device ID.
VER 02 Protocol Version.
GEO_ID 1 ~ 200 Geo-fence ID.
ACTIVE 0 or 1 Enable (1) or disable (0).
LAT String Central latitude of circular area.
LON String Central longitude of circular area.
RADIUS String meter Radius of circular area:
Range: 30~65,000.
IN 0 or 1 Alert that a vehicle enters into the circular area.
Enable (1) or disable (0).
OUT 0 or 1 Alert that a vehicle goes out from the circular area.
Enable (1) or disable (0).
<Example>
[command] ST300CGF;100850000;02;1;1;+37.000000;+127.000000;50;1;1
[response] ST300CGF;Res;100850000;010;1;1;+37.000000;+127.000000;50;1;1

4-9. Additional Parameters (TCP/UDP Parameters)

In order to set these parameters properly, read carefully the contents and <Example> along with <Note> described
in the bottom inside the table below. In setting a new device, the Additional Parameter section available in the
SyncTrak program will show you detailed explanation on how to set parameters relating to these Fields.

UDP_
HDR DEV_ID VER SVR_TYPE B_SVR_TYPE DEV_PORT
ACK
Reserved SAT_OUT SAT_DELAY SAT_RS232 BAT_VOLT_LIMIT Reserved

CRR_EN SPD_EN SPD_TIME HIST_EVT

Field Marks Value Meaning


HDR ST300ADP Command type.

DEV_ID 9 char Device ID.
VER 02 Protocol Version.
SVR_TYPE T / U Server Protocol Type:
T: TCP.
U: UDP.
B_SVR_TYPE T / U Backup Server Protocol Type:
Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document
Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 31 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

T: TCP.
U: UDP.
UDP_ACK 0 ~ 3 ACK from the server when UDP is used:

0: No Use.

1: ACK (ACKnowledgement to be made by the server right after


receiving a report from the device) when the server receives
reports except Alive.

2: ACK when the server receives reports except STT (Status)


Report and Alive Report.

3: ACK when the server receives an emergency report.


Command response doesnt need ACK.
DEV_PORT String It is a port of the device for receiving commands from the
server via UDP.

It can be used only when UDP server is used.

If 0 or empty, the device would use port 9000.


If not zero, the device can receive commands through the port,
DEV_PORT.
No Used 0 Should be 0.
SAT_OUT 0~4 Output control for satellite modem can detect the situation of no
GSM.

0 = Disable.

1 ~ 4 = Enable satellite if lost GSM signal.


SATELLITE OUT 1 OUT 2
1 X X
2 O X
3 X O
4 O O
Please refer to the <Note> below, Control of Satellite Modem.

In case of 300F
SAT_OUTshall be set to 0 (Disable).
SAT_DELAY String Sec Time length delayed inactivating the output after losing the
GSM/GPRS signal:

Range: 0 ~ 86400.
Please refer to the below <Note>, Control of Satellite Modem.
SAT_RS232 String 0 or 1 Send reports through RS232 when SAT_OUT is activated:

0: Disable.

1: Enable.
<Caution>: This function uses only for device which
supporting RS232.

Please refer to the <Note>below, Control of Satellite Modem.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 32 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

In case of 300F
SAT_RS232shall be set to 0 (Disable).
SAT_T1 String Sec Interval to be set to send a Status Report in parking mode in
no GPRS and no GSM:

Range: 0 ~ 86400.
If 0, a report in parking will be sent only one time when vehicle
starts being parked.
SAT_T2 String Sec Interval to be set to send a Status Report in driving mode no
GPRS and no GSM:

Range: 0 ~ 60000.

If 0, a report in driving will be sent only one time when vehicle


starts driving.
BAT_VOLT_LIMIT 0 This parameter is not used now.
It should by 0
Reserved 0
CRR_EN 0 or 1 Crash Construction Report
Disable (0) / Enable (1)
SPD_EN 0 or 1 Sec Report summarized data packed.
Disable (0) / Enable (1)
If 0 the device not report. If 1the device will report the
summarized data packed every 60 second.
SPD_TIME 0 ~ 180 Sampling Summarized data report time. If 0 the device not report, only
store in the memory.
HIST_EVT String Hour Interval for sending histogram report in Hour
Range : 0, 1 ~ 24
If 0, not sending histogram report.

<Example>
[command] ST300ADP;205989898;02;U;T;2;8700;0;4;1;0;180;180;2.56;0;1;1;1;1
[response] ST300ADP;Res;205989898;630;U;T;2;8700;0;4;1;0;180;180;2.56;0;1;1;1;1

<Notes>
ACK in case of UDP
UDP is protocol that does not check if the data has been transmitted successfully. So, the device checks
completion of sending with ACK depending on UDP_ACK type.
ACK is sent by server when the server receives the data.
If the ACK has not been received for more than 2 minutes after being sent, the device recognizes the data has
not been reached to the server and sends the data again.

Examples of ACK report are as below.


String Format : ST300ACK;100850000
Zip Format : 0x150x10 0x08 0x50 0x00 0x00

Device users are recommended to set ACK_TYPE to 1 to confirm that all the data can be transmitted
successfully.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 33 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

Report Type UDP_ACK=0 UDP_ACK=1 UDP_ACK=2 UDP_ACK=3


Alive X X X X
STT X O X X
Event, Alert, Etc. X O O X
Emergency X O O O

<Note>
O: Necessary
X: Not necessary

Control of Satellite Modem

SAT_OUT, SAT_DELAY and SAT_RS232 are used for a connected satellite modem. In this case, the device can
communicate with its server instead of the device under the situation of no GSM/GPRS.

Operation of the control is made as follows:

1. If no GSM/GPRS situation continues for more than SAT_DELAY, the device activates the related output
pursuant to SAT_OUT.
2. If SAT_OUT is activated, the satellite modem detects no GSM situation and automatically starts
communication by itself.
3. If SAT_RS232 is enabled, the device sends STT string which has 0 in MSG_TYPE field through RS232.
And then, it sends all the reports except for STT and Alive.
4. If the GSM signal is recovered, the device deactivates the output line related with SAT_OUT. If
SAT_RS232 is enabled, STT string which has 0 in MSG_TYPE field is sent prior to the deactivation.
5. The ST340R model can support only 0, 1, 2 of the SAT_OUT.

DPA2

CRR_EN, SPD_EN, SPD_TIME, HIST_EVT fields are appeared in ST300A, ST300D, ST300H. Other devices
are reserved.

Satellite Interval
SAT_T1, SAT_T2 fields are appeared in ST300R. Other devices are reserved.

4-10. New parameter setting

This table shows how to set the parameters related with the reporting intervals. In order to set these parameters
properly, read carefully the contents and <Example> along with <Note> described in the bottom inside the table
below. In setting a new device, the New Parameter Setting section available in the SyncTrak program will show
you detailed explanation on how to set parameters relating to these Fields.

HDR DEV_ID VER ANGLE_RPT RPT_TYPE ANTITHFT_CNT1 ANTITHFT_CNT2 JAM_DET

JAM_CHK_DIST JAM_CHK_TM VI_ON_THRES VI_ON_DELAY VI_ON_PERCENT

VI_OFF_THRES VI_OFF_DELAY VI_OFF_PERCENT HBM

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 34 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

Field Marks Value Meaning


HDR ST300NPT Command type.
DEV_ID 9 char Device ID.
VER 02 Protocol Version.
ANGLE_RPT String 0~180 Reporting about the STT Message if the steering angle is
greater than ANGLE_RPT:

0: Disable.
Range: 1 to 180 degrees.
RPT_TYPE String 0 or 1 How to set a sequential rule of storing/erasing reports if buffer
of the device is full of reports un-sent to the server:

0: FIFO (First in First Out).


1: LIFO (Last In First Out).
ANTITHFT_CNT1 String Sec Delay of Anti-Theft Release:

Range: 10~ 60000.

When ignition is on, it starts Anti-Theft emergency state after


the user-defined time.
ANTITHFT_CNT2 String Sec Delay of Anti-Theft Alert:

Range: 0~ 60000.

When it is Anti-theft emergency state, it sends the emergency


report after the user-defined time.
JAM_DET String 0 ~4 GPRS or GPRS+GPS Jamming detection function:

0 = Disable.
1 ~ 4 = enabled jamming detection and if detected first, check
assist functions and then triggered by JAM_DET mode as
follows.
JAM_DET Alert Active Immob. Active Buzzer
1 O X X
2 O O X
3 O X O
4 O O O

X Inactive, O Activated if jamming is detected.

Immobilizer: You can disable it by command.

Buzzer: It is disabled automatically after being released from


jamming.

Device will send an alert after recovering the GSM network.


It takes about 2 minutes or more for the device to complete a
jamming detection.

Default: 0.
JAM_CHK_DIST 0 ~60000 Meter This is complementary to the detection function of device
described above on the GPRS jamming by utilizing a distance
value as a parameter when jamming is done.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 35 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

Once jamming on the GPRS network starts being detected,


the device will also check the distance between the current
location of the vehicle and the First geographical Point (Fp)
where the jamming started being detected.

If the distance is greater than JAM_CHK_DIST for a while,


triggered by JAM_DET mode.

If 0, skip this procedure.

Default: 500 meters.


JAM_CHK_TM It is complementary to the function of GPRS jamming
0 ~ 43200 Sec. detection in an area without GPS connectivity (No GPS).

After detecting jamming first in such a bad GPS connecting


area, the device begins to count the 2 time-length factors (A
and B) to make a sum (A + B = C) if the vehicle moves in the
area:
A: time length that needs to complete the
jamming detection
B: time length that the vehicle driver needs to
complete driving in the area.

If C (the sum) is longer than the length of the jamming


detection (JAM_CHK_TM) the device judges that jamming
was done in the area. Please refer to the table for more details.

If the device has not moved in the area, ignore jamming


detection until the jamming detection function is released.

If 0, skip this procedure.

Default: 300 seconds.


VI_ON_THRES String 1/255G Threshold value for Motion Virtual Ignition On:

Range: 3~30.
Default: 5.
VI_ON_DELAY String Sec. Delay time for Motion Virtual Ignition On:

Range: 3~999.
Default: 10.
VI_ON_PERCENT String % Percent for Motion Virtual Ignition On:

Range: 30~100.
Default: 70.
VI_OFF_THRES String 1/255G Threshold value for Motion Virtual Ignition Off:

Range: 3~30.
Default: 5.
VI_OFF_DELAY String Sec. Delay time for Motion Virtual Ignition Off:

Range: 3~999.
Default: 10.
VI_OFF_PERCENT String % Percent for Motion virtual Ignition Off:

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 36 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

Range: 30 ~ 100.
Default: 70.
HBM 1 Should be 1
<Example>
[command] ST300NPT;100850000;02;0;0;10;0;0;500;300;5;10;70;5;10;70;0

[response] ST300NPT;Res;100850000;515;0.0;0;10;0;0;500;300;5;10;70;5;10;70;1

Jamming detection procedure

JAM_CHK_DIST and & JAM_CHK_TM are complementary to jamming detection to avoid false detection.
At least, we recommend that users of our device should utilize the JAM_CHK_DIST for safety purposes.
If you use the 2 (two) functions, it can detect the following two cases of jamming:

*Case A: Jamming GPRS only.


Jamming detected ->JAM_CHK_DIST -> JAM_CHK_TM -> Triggered by JAM_DET mode.

*Case B: Jamming GPRS & GPS.


Jamming detected ->JAM_CHK_TM -> Triggered by JAM_DET mode.

JAM_CHK_DIST: If 0, skip this function.


JAM_CHK_TM: If 0, skip this function.

In a case that all of the complementary functions are disabled, device starts working according to the jamming
mode (JAM_DET mode) after detecting the jamming. In such a case, a false detection might be made in an area
having a weak GSM connectivity or in an area having a strong radio.

<NOTE>
The ST340R model can support only 0~ 3 of the JAM_DET

4-11. Telemetry parameters

This table shows how to set the parameters related with telemetry. In order to set these parameters properly, read
carefully the contents and <Example> along with <Note> described in the bottom inside the table below. In setting
a new device, the New Parameter Setting section available in the SyncTrak program will show you detailed
explanation on how to set parameters relating to these Fields.

HDR DEV_ID VER TRAVEL_EVT ODO_USE ODO_UNIT RPM_UNIT ECO_MAX_RPM

ECO_MIN_RPM MAX_RPM DID_OUT_CTRL MASTER_ADD MASTER_REMOVE

CHK_GEAR CHK_GEAR_TIME CHK_GEAR_RPM MAX_REST_TIME MAX_STOP_TIME

Field Marks Value Meaning


HDR ST300HTP Command type.
DEV_ID 9 char Device ID.
VER 02 Protocol Version.
TRAVEL_EVT String 0 or 1 0: Does not send travel event string.
1:Sendtravel event string when the vehicle is parked.
ODO_USE String 0 or 1 0:UseGPS to report speed and distance.
Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document
Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 37 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

1:Useodometer to report speed and distance.


ODO_UNIT String Pulse Number of pulse per km (kilo meter)

If the field is "A", ODO_UNIT should be calibrated by the


installer. Refer to 9-10 of this document about odometer
calibration.
RPM_UNIT String pulse Number of pulse per 1000RPM

If the field is "A", RPM_UNIT should be calibrated by the


installer. Refer to 9-10 of this document about RPM
calibration.
ECO_MAX_RPM String RPM Maximum RPM of economic range.
ECO_MIN_RPM String RPM Minimum RPM of economic range.
MAX_RPM String RPM Maximum RPM

When RPM of vehicle exceeds the MAX_RPM, the device


counts this time and reports in travel event string.
DID_OUT_CTRL String 0 ~4 Output control by Driver ID
Out 1 Out 2
0 X X
1 O O
2 X O
3 O X
O: It means the output is activated automatically when the
vehicle starts being driven (ignition on) without the registered
driver ID.
X: Not control
MASTER_ADD String Master driver ID to register new driver ID

Master is inserted and removed. And then, another I-buttons


inserted within 10s after removing the master. In this case,
another ID can be registered automatically.
MASTER_REMOVE String Master driver ID to unregister driver ID

Master is inserted and removed. And then, another I-button


is inserted within 10s after removing the master. In this case,
another ID can be unregistered automatically.
CHK_GEAR String 0 or 1 Enable/disable checking if the vehicle moves by shifting the
gear stick into the position of Gear Neutral.
Gear Neutral situation is checked when the vehicle moves
fast at an extremely low RPM.
0: Disable.
1: Enable.
CHK_GEAR_TIME String Sec. Time to check CHK_GEAR

Range: 3~999.
Recommended value: 10.
CHK_GEAR_RPM String RPM RPM value to judge alert situation of CHK_GEAR

Recommended value: 1000.


MAX_REST_TIME String Sec. Time to alert for no driving with ignition on

If not 0, the device alerts when the driver stops with ignition
on during more MAX_REST_TIME.
Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document
Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 38 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

MAX_STOP_TIME String Sec. Time to alert for stopping

If not 0, the device alerts when the time of stop exceeds


MAX_STOP_TIME.
<Example>
[command] ST300HTP;100850000;02;1;1;16344;16;3200;1500;4000;0;0100004E160000;;1;10;1000;0;0
[response] ST300HTP;Res;100850000;267;1;1;16344;16;3200;1500;4000;0;0100004E160000;;1;10;1000;0;0

<Notes>
This setting works only on ST300H, ST300A and ST300K. ST300A and ST300K use only
DID_OUT_CTRL/MASTER_ADD/MASTER_REMOVE / MAX_STOP_TIME field, other fields should be 0.

A. Travel Event Report to prevent from driving vehicle down by positioning gear stick in neutral

In order to save fuel for vehicle, there are some drivers who drive vehicle by shifting the gearbox stick into the
neutral position, especially, while the vehicle is running from a high area down (i.e. a sliding-down slope)
toward a low altitude area.
It is very dangerous to drive a vehicle in such a way and such a bad driving behavior should be prohibited. The
variant models of the ST300 Series specified above have a useful detection function, named Dead Center
Checking, which prevents drivers from doing such a bad driving behavior.

This function can be operational after checking the values of the relevant parameters such as :
CHK_GEAR(checking enable/disable),
CHK_GEAR_RPM
CHK_GEAR_TIME

If a vehicle has been being driven under a driving condition of lower than a preset value of
CHK_GEAR_RPM for a longer time period than the present time period of CHK_GEAR_TIME, this feature
assumes that the vehicle is driven for this time period as a bad driving behavior (i.e. driving vehicle down with
the gear being positioned <neutral>) and makes a report, which is named as Travel Event Report. In that
case, such a bad driving time is reported to the server of the device.

B. Travel Event Report for Economical Driving to save fuel

User of device can save fuel in driving the vehicle by utilizing Travel Event Report if he/she pre-sets the 2
parameters (ECO_MAX_RPM and ECO_MIN_RPM) in order to make a range.
After value of the 2 parameters is pre-set and when driving is over, the device will report to its server about the
driving time by 3 categories:

Category A: How long the vehicle has been driven covering ECO_MAX_RPM and
ECO_MIN_RPM
Category B: How long the vehicle has been driven under the ECO_MIN_RPM
Category C : How long the vehicle has been driven over the ECO_MAX_RPM

4-12. Driver ID parameters

4-12-1. How to add Driver ID

This chapter shows how to add the driver ID to the registration table as shown on the bottom part of this chart. If
a vehicle is driven without processing to register driver ID in proper way, this feature assumes that the vehicle is
driven by non-registered driver. In this case, the device can activate immobilizer.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 39 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

HDR DEV_ID VER DID_POS (1st) DID (1st) DID_POS (last) DID (last)

Field Marks Value Meaning


HDR ST300HAD Command type.
DEV_ID 9 char Device ID.
VER 02 Protocol Version.
DID_POS (1st) String 1~ 100 Index position of driver ID to save.
DID(1st) String 14hex digits Driver ID.


DID_POS (last) String 1~ 100 Index position of driver ID to save.
DID(last) String 14hex digits Driver ID.
<Example>
[command] ST300HAD;100850000;02;001;00001000000000;002;00002000ABCDEF;005;00003333AAAAAA;

[response] ST300HAD;Res;100850000;267;001; 00001000000000;002; 00002000ABCDEF;005;00003333
AAAAAA;

After receiving this command, the device will save the new driver ID as shown in the table below.
1st position 00001000000000 2nd position 00002000ABCDEF
rd
3 position 4th position
5th position 00003333AAAAAA

4-12-2. How to remove Driver ID

The table below shows how to remove the driver IDs that you want to eliminate.
HDR DEV_ID VER DID_POS

Field Marks Value Meaning


HDR ST300HRD Command type.
DEV_ID 9 char Device ID.
VER 02 Protocol Version.
DID_POS String 1~ 100 Index position of driver ID to remove.
or If ALL, all the driver ID will be removed.
ALL
<Example>
[command] ST300HRD;100850000;02;001
[response] ST300HRD;Res;100850000;267;001

4-12-3. How to get Drive ID

HDR DEV_ID VER HD_DID DRIVE_ID_N ID_DRIVER

Field Marks Value Meaning


HDR ST300HGD Command type.
DEV_ID 9 char Device ID.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 40 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

VER 02 Protocol Version.


DID_POS String 1~ 100 Driver IDs position.
or
ALL
If ALL, the device should inform all driver IDs.
<Example>
[command] ST300HGD;100850000;02;001
[response] ST300HGD;Res;100850000;267;001;00001000000000

In a case that the device has 21 driver IDs:


[command] ST300HGD;100850000;ALL
[response]
ST300HGD;Res;100850000;267;001;01000000000101;002;01000000000102;003;01000000000103;
004;01000000000104;005;01000000000105;006;01000000000106;007;01000000000107;
008;01000000000108;009;01000000000101;010;01000000000101;011;01000000000111;
012;01000000000112;013;01000000000113;014;01000000000114;015;01000000000115;
016;01000000000116;017;01000000000117;018;01000000000118;019;01000000000119;
020;01000000000120;Continued
ST300HGD;Res;100850000;267;021;01000000000121

4-13. How to set Driver Pattern Analysis parameters

This table shows how a device user can set parameters for circular geo-fencing. In order to set these parameters
properly, read carefully the contents and <Example> along with <Note> described in the bottom inside the table
below. In setting a new device, the SyncTrak will show you detailed explanation on how to set parameters relating
to these Fields.

HDR DEV_ID VER DRVPTN_EN BASESPEED FASTACCEL

HARSHBRAKE SHARPTURN OVERSPEED

Field Marks Value Meaning


HDR ST300DPA Command type
DEV_ID 9 char. Device ID
VER 02 Protocol Version
DRVPTN_EN 0 or 1 0 : disable
1 : enable
BASESPEED String Km/h Base speed limitation value (default :
Device will be checking Driver Pattern Data when the current
speed is over this value.
FASTACCEL String 1/256G Fast acceleration violation value
This value is based on the difference value of speed during 1
second.
HARSHBRAKE String 1/256G Harsh brake violation value
SHARPTURN String 1/256G Sharp turn violation value
OVERSPEED String Km/h Over speed violation value
HAB_BUZZER String 0 or 1 0 : Disable active output (Buzzer) when sending Driver
Pattern alert
1 : Enable active output (Buzzer) when sending Driver
Pattern alert
TIME_BUZZER String Time to active Buzzer when driver pattern alert.
<example>
Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document
Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 41 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

[command] ST300DPA;600850000;02;1;0.0;30.0;100.0;70.0;100.0;1;10
[response] ST300DPA;Res;600850000;010;1;0.0;30.0;100.0;70.0;100.0;1;10

4-14. Vehicle Engine Information

CAN bus (CAN) is the name given to the communication network in a vehicle that is used for transferring
information between the various ECUs (i.e.: Electronic Control Units).Once users of CAN (i.e.: Controller Area
Network) model device configure the device based on the information about various factors as listed in the Fields
as shown in the following table (e.g. Engine Speed, Odometer, Total Fuel, Vehicle Speed, Engine Coolant
Temperature, etc.) and if the vehicle exceeds the pre-set limits, the device sends report(s)to the server.

4-14-1. How to Set Parameters for Engine Event

The following table shows how to set the parameters based on the various information provided through ECU of
the vehicle:

HDR DEV_ID VER MODE EVS SPD ET OIL_P ERPM SHB ADD_CLAIM

Field Mark Value Meaning


HDR ST300ECU Command type
DEV_ID 6 char. Device ID
VER 02 Protocol Version
MODE String Mode of Vehicle Engine Information

0 = Disable.
1 = Enable

If this field is set to1, Engine Speed, Odometer and Total


Fuel are included in the Report Fields. (For more detail,
please refer to the Report section.) .

Otherwise, all of them are not included.

Default : 0
EVS String Km/h Exceed Vehicle Speed : 0-250
Default : 120

Valid duration is 10sec.


Default : 0
SPD String Km/h Speed limit : 0-250
Default : 0

Valid duration is 10sec.


Default : 0
ET String Deg C Limit value for Engine Coolant Temperature : -40 ~ 210

Valid duration is 10sec.


Default : 0
OIL_P String kPa Limit value for Oil Pressure : 0 ~ 1000

Valid duration is 5sec.


Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document
Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 42 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

Default : 0
ERPM String rpm Limit value for Engine RPM : 0~8031

Valid duration is 5sec.


Default : 0
SHB String Km/h / sec Limit value for Sudden Hard Brake : 0 ~ 250
Default : 0
ADD_CLAIM String J1939 Resource Address

YOU MUST ALWAYS SET TO 0.

However, you can change this value only in a case that an


exceptional problem happens, for instance, in a case that
the device does not work with other devices of the vehicle
on the CAN network because of addresses of the various
devices conflicting against those of the other devices within
the vehicle.

Range of Address: 1 84(all the industry groups)

If you need more information, please contact us.

Default source address is 0xFA for Off-Board Diagnostic


Group #2.

DO NOT use OBD which uses 0xFA with our device.


Otherwise, you have to change this value.

Default : 0
<Example>
[command] ST300ECU;100850000;02;1;120;100;200;100;8000;14.3;0
[response] ST300ECU;Res;100850000;02;1;120;100;200;100;8000;14.3;0
[response] ST300ECU;Res;100850000;02;CE

<Note>
If the device cannot initialize the MCU for J1939, it will be reporting error such as CE.

4-14-2. How to Get ECU Command Parameters

The following table shows how to get information about the parameters of commands relating to ECU.

HDR DEV_ID VER MODE EVS SPD ET OIL_P ERPM SHB ADD_CLAIM

Field Mark Value Meaning


HDR ST300GES Command type
DEV_ID 6 char. Device ID
VER 02 Protocol Version

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 43 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

<Example>
[command] ST300GES;100850000;02
[response] ST300GES;Res;100850000;02;1;120;100;200;100;8000;14.3;0

4-14-3. Requesting Information about ECU (or ECM) by J1939

The following table shows how to get information about ECU (or ECM: Electronic Control Module)
compliant with J1939

HDR DEV_ID VER

Field Mark Value Meaning


HDR ST300GED Command type
DEV_ID 6 char. Device ID
VER 02 Protocol Version
<Example>
[command] ST300GED;100850000;02
[response]ST300GED;Res;100850000;292;20110101;02:06:16;00000;+19.445873;-
099.126891;000.000;000.00;0;0;0;12.39;000000;0;0.00;0.00;0.00;0;0;0.00;0;00000000;0.00;0.00

HDR Res DEV_ID SW_VER DATE TIME CELL LAT LON SPD CRS SATT

FIX DIST PWR_VOLT I/O

TO TF VS IF E_TMP OIL_PRE E_RPM T_CRU

DTC EIDLE F_ECO

Field Marks Meaning


HDR ST300GED Engine Data report header
Res Res Response
DEV_ID 6 char. Device ID
SW_VER 3 char. Software Version
DATE 8 char. GPS date (yyyymmdd)
TIME 8 char. GPS time (hh:mm:ss)
CELL String Location Code ID(3 digits hex) + Serving Cell BSIC(2 digits decimal)
LAT String Latitude (+/-xx.xxxxxx)
LON String Longitude (+/-xxx.xxxxxx)
SPD String Speed in km/h
CRS String Course over ground in degree
SATT String Number of satellites
FIX 1 or 0 GPS is fixed (1), GPS is not fixed (0)
DIST String Traveled distance by meter
PWR_VOLT String Voltage value of main power
I/O 6 char. Current I/O status of inputs and outputs

Ignition + Input1 + Input 2 + Input 3 + Out1 + Out2


Ignition : 1 (ON), 0 (OFF)
Input1 ~ Input3 : 1 (Ground, Shorted), 0 (Opened)
Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document
Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 44 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

Out1 ~ Out2 : 1 (Active), 0 (Inactive)


TO String Odometer in Km/h
TF String Total fuel used in Lts (liters)
VS String Vehicle Speed In Km/h
IF String Idle Fuel in Hr
E_TMP String Engine Coolant Temperature in C
OIL_PRE String Oil Pressure in kPa
E_RPM String Engine RPM
T_CRU String Total Cruise Active time in sec.
DTC String DTC code

High byte: active error code


Low byte: Previous active error code.
It is a hex code, not decimal.
E_IDLE String Engine Idle time in sec
F_ECO String Fuel Economy in km/L
<Example>
ST300GED;Res;100850000;010;20080101;00:02:37;00000;+36.479528;+127.885968;000.000;000.00;0;0;0;11.
93;000000;0;181312.00;0.00;0.00;60;0;40.00;17;0;0.00;0.00

4-15. LATAM (Latin America) parameters

In order to set these various parameters properly, read carefully the contents and <Example> along with <Note>
described in the bottom inside the table below. In setting a new device, the SyncTrak will show you detailed
explanation on how to set parameters relating to these Fields.

HDR DEV_ID VER PANIC_SND_DIR LIMIT_STOP_TIME CMD_RES_DIR

ST300A / ST300K
HDR DEV_ID VER PANIC_SND_DIR LIMIT_STOP_TIME CMD_RES_DIR TEMP_SENSOR

ST340LC: ENCRYPTION (*Optionally Available)


HDR DEV_ID VER PANIC_SND_DIR LIMIT_STOP_TIME CMD_RES_DIR
ENCRYPTION ENCRYPTION_KEY

Field Marks Value Meaning


HDR ST300LTM Command type.
DEV_ID 9 char Device ID.
VER 02 Protocol Version.
PANIC_SND_DIR String How to set the sending type of panic emergency

0: Send to server
1: Send to SMS
2: Send to server and SMS

If you want to set it to1 or 2, you should set the SMS


numbers in Network Parameter Setting.
Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document
Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 45 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

LIMIT_STOP_TIME String Min Device sends this alert if the vehicle does not move for a
time interval (i.e. LIMIT_STOP_TIME) in a status of Ignition
On, which means that the engine is being operated. If this
status exceeds such a time interval, an alert is made by the
device automatically. This function is operational only if you
have already set the Event Parameter to Use Ignition Line.

If you set it to 0, you cannot use the Stop Limit Function.

Range : 0 ~ 1440
CMD_RES_DIR String How to set direction of Command response

0: No Use
1: Server
2: SMS
TEMP_SENSOR String Using the Temperature sensor (**)

0: No Use
1: Use
ENCRYPTION String Using the Encryption of Reporting data (**)
0 :No Use
1: Use
ENCRYPTION_KEY String Secret Code to encrypt the reporting message.(**)
<Example>

[command] ST300LTM;100850000;02;1;2;0
[response] ST300LTM;Res;100850000;010;1;2;0

ST300A / ST300K
[command] ST300LTM;;02;0;0;0;1
[response] ST300LTM;Res;600850779;557;0;0;0;1

ST340LC ENCRYPTION (**Optionally available)


[command] ST300LTM;;02;0;0;0;1;2b7e151628aed2a6abf7158809ff4f3d
[response] ST300LTM;Res;600850779;558;0;0;0;1;2b7e151628aed2a6abf7158809ff4f3d

<Note>:

** TEMP_SENSOR : Only 2 device models (i.e. ST300A, ST300K) support function of the temperature sensors.
The firmware version number of the ST300A / ST300K, which is higher than 557, supports function of the
temperature sensor.

** ENCRYPTION , ENCRYPTION_KEY : This function is optionally available only for the customers of the
ST340LC model who want to use the encryption functionality.

** ENCRYPTION_KEY: The input code length must consist of 32 digits and the input character that users can
use ranges from 0 to 9, a to f, A to F

** ENCRYPTION: If you want to use the encryption function on your device, first of all, please contact engineers
of Suntech via e-mail at info@suntechint.com

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 46 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

4-16. Polygon geo-fence parameters

4-16-1. How to set polygon geo-fence for each group

Each polygonal geo-fence group setting can make a sequential progress only with the sequential command packet.
The command flow is as below.

(1st) Set Polygon Group +


(2nd) Whole Command of Set Polygon Position + ..
(last) Set Polygon Group Enable/Disable

Polygon group setting can be completed by Set Polygon Enable/Disable command.


If the next command cannot reach within 10minutes after receiving the last command, the setting procedure ends
automatically and Set Polygon Group command (1st step) should be sent again for setting.

4-16-1-1. How to set Polygon Group (Sequential Command 1st)

Field Marks Value Meaning


HDR ST300PLG Command type
DEV_ID String Device ID
VER 02 Protocol Version
CMD_NO 1 Sequential number of series of commands
TOTAL_CMD_NO Total number of series of commands
GROUP_ID 1 ~ 50 Polygon group ID
ALLOW_PARAM 0 or 1 If 1, all the parameters of the following Fields of this Chapter
(i.e. Chapter 4-16-1-1) will be functional. However, If 0, all
the parameters will not be functional.

Some examples for these functions (i.e. Case 1 and Case 2)


are explained taken as follows:

Case 1:

<Case 1> is operational if you set the parameters to the


values as follows:

T2 (interval in driving) of Report Parameter=


120,
ALLOW_PARAM = 0, and
PT_INTERVAL_IN_DRIVING = 30

In the <Case 1> that the parameters have already been set
as above, the device sends the report at an interval of 30
seconds as soon as the vehicle gets into the pre-set geo-
fence territory (i.e. a vehicle in a driving mode). The device
will send a report every 120 seconds as soon as the vehicle
gets out of the geo-fence territory.

Case 2:

<Case 2> is operational if you set the parameters to the


values as follows:
Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document
Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 47 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

T2 (interval in driving) of Report Parameter=


120,
ALLOW_PARAM = 0, and
PT_INTERVAL_IN_DRIVING = 30

In the <Case 2> that the parameters have already been set
as above, the device sends the reports every 120 seconds
as long as the vehicle is in a mode of driving. It means that,
in Case 2, the device sends the report at an interval of 120
seconds wherever the vehicle may be.
RPT_INTERVAL_IN String Sec Interval for sending status report in parking
_PARKING
Range : 0 ~ 86400

If 0, report in parking will be sent only one time when vehicle


starts being parked.
RPT_INTERVAL_IN String Sec Interval for sending status report in driving
_DRIVING
Range : 0 ~ 60000

If 0, report in driving will be sent only one time when vehicle


starts being driven.
ALIVE_REPORT_ 0 or 1 Selection of report string type in parking
IN_PARKING
If 0, all reports in parking will be STT report.

If 1, all reports except for 1st report after changing to parking


will be Alive report when vehicle is parked.
SPEED_LIMIT String Km/h Over speed limit for reporting to server

If 0, the device does not check over speed.

If 1 and the vehicle runes over predefined value, device


reports speed alerts once.
Range : 0 ~ 300.00
BUZZER_SPEED_ String Km/h Over speed limit for alerting by buzzer
LIMIT
If 0, the device does not check over speed.

Range : 0 ~ 300.00
Not Used 0 Should be 0
Not Used 0 Should be 0
Not Used 0 Should be 0
Not Used 0 Should be 0
GEO_LABEL String Geo-fence label

Range: 0 ~ 16 character.
<Note>
This command can be sent as an independent packet.
Please refer to the following example :

ST300PLG;100850000;02;1;1;1;1;3600;60;1;80.5;75;28.5;2;30.33;1;position 1

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 48 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

4-16-1-2. How to set Polygon Position (Sequential Command - Middle)

Field Marks Value Meaning


HDR ST300PLG Command type
DEV_ID String Device ID
VER 02 Protocol Version
CMD_NO 2 ~ Sequential number of a series of commands
TOTAL_CMD_NO Total number of the series of commands
GROUP_ID 1 ~ 50 Polygon group ID
LONGITUDE1 Longitude
LATITUDE1 Latitude
LONGITUDE2 Longitude
LATITUDE2 Latitude


LONGITUDE5 Longitude
LATITUDEN5 Latitude

4-16-1-3. How to set Polygon Group Enable/Disable (Sequential Command - Last)

Field Marks Value Meaning


HDR ST300PLG Command type
DEV_ID String Device ID
VER 02 Protocol Version
CMD_NO 1 ~ Sequential number of a series of commands
TOTAL_CMD_NO Total number of the series of commands
GROUP_ID 1 ~ 50 Polygon group ID
ENABLE 0 or 1 Enable of the polygonal geo-fence group

<Note> :

This command can be sent independently to change enable/disable state.


In this case, both CMD_NO and TOTAL_CMD_NO is 1

[command] ST300PLG;100850000;02;1;1;1;0

4-16-1-4. Examples of sequential commands

In a case that the Group1 has 8 positions, the followings show how such 4 sets of command/response, for
example, react:

[command] ST300PLG;100850000;02;1;4;1;1;3600;60;1;80.5;75;28.5;2;30.33;1;position 1
[response] ST300PLG;Res;100850000;104;1;4;1;1;3600;60;1;80.5;75;28.5;2;30.33;1;position 1

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 49 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

[command] ST300PLG;100850000;02;2;4;1;126.885545;37.480648;126.887466;37.478162;126.885095;
37.477506;126.884279;37.479005;126.883764;37.478885
[response] ST300PLG;Res;100850000;104;2;4;1;126.885545;37.480648;126.887466;37.478162;126.885095;
37.477506;126.884279;37.479005;126.883764;37.478885

[command]
ST300PLG;100850000;02;3;4;1;126.884773;37.476655;126.888517;37.477710;126.886328;37.480520;;;;
[response] ST300PLG;Res;100850000;104;3;4;1;126.884773;37.476655;126.888517;37.477710;
126.886328;37.480520;;;;

[command] ST300PLG;100850000;02;4;4;1;1
[response] ST300PLG;Res;100850000;104;4;4;1;1

The followings show how 2 sets of command/response, for example, react if the Group1 has no positions
(if all the positions are erased):
[command] ST300PLG;100850000;02;1;2;1;0;0;0;0;0;0;0;0;0;0;0
[response] ST300PLG;Res;100850000;104;1;2;1;0;0;0;0;0;0;0;0;0;0

[command] ST300PLG;100850000;02;2;2;1;0
[response] ST300PLG;Res;100850000;104;2;2;1;0

4-16-2. How to set Polygon Service

Field Marks Value Meaning


HDR ST300PLS Command type
DEV_ID String Device ID
VER 02 Protocol Version
OUT_PROTECT 0 or 1 If 1, position tracking stops when the vehicle moves out
from an activated polygonal geo-fence. In this case, reporting
with GPS is deactivated. We name this function <Out
Protect>.

You can set the parameters to utilize the function of <Out


Protect> for all the Polygon groups (i.e.: 50 groups) and all
the Polygon positions (i.e.: 60 positions) as well.

ALIVE_RPT_INTER String Sec Interval for sending alive report.


VAL_OUTSIDE
Range : 0 ~ 86400

If <OUT_PROTECT> is enable, Alive Report is sent at an


interval of < ALIVE_RPT_INTERVAL_OUTSIDE> as soon as
the vehicle gets outside from a polygon geo-fence group.

The Alive Report is sent at this interval regardless of


parking/driving state of the vehicle.

If 0, Alive Report is not sent.


<Example>
[command] ST300PLS;100850000;02;1;3600
[response] ST300PLS;Res;100850000;104;1;3600
Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document
Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 50 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

4-16-3. How to get Information about Polygon Group

Field Marks Value Meaning


HDR ST300PLC Command type
DEV_ID String Device ID
VER 02 Protocol Version
CMD GetPolygonGroupInfo Command
GROUP_ID 1 ~ 50 Polygon group ID
<Example>
[command] ST300PLC;100850000;02;GetPolygonGroupInfo;1
[response] ST300PLC;Res;100850000;104;GetPolygonGroupInfo;1;1;1;60;0;3600;28.5;2;30.33;1;8;position 1

A response string which comes after GROUP_ID consists of the following fields as shown in the table below
ENABLE
ALLOW_ RPT_INTERVAL_ RPT_INTERVAL_ ALIVE_INTERVAL_
SPEED_LIMIT
PARAM IN_PARKING IN_DRIVING IN_PARKING
BUZZER_SPEED
ACCEL_SPEED ACCEL_TIME DECEL_SPEED DECEL_TIME
_LIMIT
POS_CNT GEO_LABEL

POS_CNT : count of set positions

4-16-4. How to get Information about Positions of the Polygon Group

Field Marks Value Meaning


HDR ST300PLC Command type
DEV_ID String Device ID
VER 02 Protocol Version
CMD GetPolygonGroupPos Command
GROUP_ID 1 ~ 50 Polygon group ID
<Example>

[command] ST300PLC;100850000;02;GetPolygonGroupPos;1

[response]
ST300PLC;Res;100850000;104;GetPolygonGroupPos;1;1;10;37.509683;126.882037;37.508841;126;880202;3
7.507981;126.80953;37.508926;126.882616;37.508887;126.901611
ST300PLC;Res;100850000;104;GetPolygonGroupPos;1;2;10;37.509683;126.882037;37.508841;126;880202;3
7.507981;126.80953;37.508926;126.882616;37.508887;126.901611

A response string which comes after GROUP_ID consists of the following Fields as shown in the table below.
TOTAL_
REPORT_NO LONGITUDE1 LATITUDE1 LONGITUDE2 LATITUDE2
REPORT_NO
LONGITUDE3 LATITUDE3 LONGITUDE4 LATITUDE4 LONGITUDE5 LATITUDE5

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 51 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

4-16-5. How to erase Polygon Group

Field Marks Value Meaning


HDR ST300PLC Command type
DEV_ID String Device ID
VER 02 Protocol Version
CMD ErasePolygonGroup Command
GROUP_ID 1 ~ 50 or A Polygon group ID
A means all the groups.
<Example>

[command] ST300PLC;100850000;02;ErasePolygonGroup;1
[response] ST300PLC;Res;100850000;104; ErasePolygonGroup;1

4-16-6. How to get information about Polygon Service

Field Marks Value Meaning


HDR ST300PLC Command type
DEV_ID String Device ID
VER 02 Protocol Version
CMD GetPolygonServiceInfo Command
<Example>
[command] ST300PLC;100850000;02;GetPolygonServiceInfo
[response] ST300PLC;Res;100850000;104;GetPolygonServiceInfo;1;3600

A response string which comes after GROUP_ID consists of the following Fields as shown in the table below.
OUT_PROTECT ALIVE_RPT_INTERVAL_OUTSIDE

4-17. Temperature parameter

In order to set these various parameters properly, read carefully the contents and <Example> along with <Note>
described in the bottom inside the table below. In setting a new device, the SyncTrak will show you detailed
explanation on how to set parameters relating to these Fields.

HDR DEV_ID VER 1ST_ID 1ST_HIGH_ALERT 1ST_LOW_ALERT


2ND_HIGH_ALE 2ND_LOW_
2ND_ID 3RD_ID 3RD_HIGH_ALERT 3RD_LOW_ALERT
RT ALERT

Field Marks Value Meaning


HDR ST300TAS Command type.
DEV_ID 9 char Device ID.
VER 02 Protocol Version.
1ST_ID String The Sensor ID of the sensor to utilize alert function in case
the temperature of the temperature sensor changes more
than the preset value of the temperature sensor.
1ST_HIGH_ALERT String How to set High Temperature value in order to send an alert

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 52 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

The range covers -55 to +125 degrees in Celsius


1ST_LOW_ALERT String How to set Low Temperature value in order to send an alert

The range covers -55 to +125 degrees in Celsius


2ND_ID String The Sensor ID of the sensor utilize alert function in case the
temperature of the second temperature sensor changes
more than the preset temperature.
2ND_HIGH_ALERT String How to set High Temperature value of the 2nd temperature
sensor to send an alert

The range covers -55 to +125 degrees in Celsius


2ND_LOW_ALERT String How to set High Temperature value of the 2nd temperature
sensor to send an alert

The range covers -55 to +125 degrees in Celsius


3RD_ID String The Sensor ID of the sensor to utilize alert function in
case the temperature of the third temperature sensor
changes more than the preset temperature.
3RD_HIGH_ALERT String How to set High Temperature value of the 3rd temperature
sensor to send an alert

The range covers -55 to +125 degrees in Celsius


3RD_LOW_ALERT String How to set Low Temperature value of the 3rd temperature
sensor to send an alert

The range covers -55 to +125 degrees in Celsius


<Example>

[command]
ST300TAS;100850000;02;28E4D95F060000D5;+24.0;+20.0;28F5573B050000AA;+26.0;+22.0;28C4D95F0600
00C5;+12.0;-10.0

[response]
ST300TAS;Res;600850779;557;28E4D95F060000D5;+24.0;+20.0;28F5573B050000AA;+26.0;+22.0;28C4D95
F060000C5;+12.0;-10.0

<Note>:
** This function works only on ST300A and ST300K.

** The setting value for the temperature is Celsius.

** An alert is sent to the server of the device when the temperature is greater than the pre-set value or is lower
than the pre-set value of the temperature.

4-18. Coin Machine Parameter

If user of device wants to use a coin machine, the user should set this Parameter (Pulse Per Value).
The user should also set the coin machine as well.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 53 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

HDR DEV_ID VER PULSE PER VAL

Field Marks Value Meaning


HDR ST300CMP Command type.
DEV_ID 9 char Device ID.
VER 02 Protocol Version.
PULSE PER VAL String This value will be multiplied by the pulse count which comes
from the Coin Machine.
<Example>

[command]
ST300CMP;100850000;02;100

[response]
ST300CMP;Res;600850779;557;100

<Note>:
** This function works only on the ST300B model to support the functionality of Coin Machine.

** If you want to count various coins by coin value such as 10 Peso Coin, 50 Peso Coin, 100 Peso Coin, and
500 Peso Coin, please set this function as follows:

Step 1. PULSE PER VAL should be set to 10.

Step 2. You should set a pulse for the coin machine by coin value as follows :
a 10 Peso coin 1
a 50 Peso coin 5
a 100 Peso coin 10
a 500 Peso coin 50

The ST300B which has been set as above will count every pulse in Ignition ON mode, whenever you insert the
coins to Coin Machine.

For example, if you insert a 10 Peso coin and a 50 Peso coin, the Coin Machine makes 6 pulses. And then,
the device multiplies 6 pulses by 10, which is the value of PULSE PER VAL. In other words, you multiply 6 by
10, which is equal to 60.

6 x 10 = 60

By completing to set the coin machine and the device (ST300B) as above, the device is able to report 60 when
a STT Report is made.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 54 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

5. Tracking and route deviation parameters

These parameters need to be set if user wants to enable the device to track moving of vehicle along the routes
predefined by the user.

In order to set these parameters properly, read carefully the contents and <Example> along with <Note> described
in the bottom inside the table below.

5-1. Start/Stop tracking

Once these parameters are set properly, the device starts tracking vehicle and alerting in case the device gets out
of the predefined route(s).

HDR DEV_ID VER TRACK_ID

Field Marks Value Meaning


HDR ST300CTR Command type.
DEV_ID 9 char Device ID.
VER 02 Protocol Version.
TRACK_ID 0/1/E/R 0 = Disable Tracking.
1 = Enable Tracking.
E = Erase All Tracking position.
R = Read Tracking Enable/Disable Status.
<Example>

[command] ST300CTR;100850000;02;1
[response] ST300CTR;Res;100850000;010;1

[command] ST300CTR;100850000;02;R;1
[response] ST300CTR;Res;100850000;010;R0 (When tracking is disabled.)
ST300CTR;Res;100850000;010;R1 (When the tracking is enabled.)

5-2. How to set tracking positions

In order to set these parameters properly, read carefully the contents and <Example> along with <Note> described
in the bottom inside the table below.

HDR DEV_ID VER TR_NO_ID LAT1 LON1 GAP1 LAT2 LON2 GAP2

Field Mark Value Meaning


HDR ST300STR Command type.
DEV_ID 9 char Device ID.
VER 02 Protocol Version.
TR_NO_ID 1 ~ 500 Starting ID of Tracking.
LAT1 String Latitude position of tracking POS ID.
LON1 String Longitude position of tracking POS ID.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 55 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

GAP1 0 meter Tolerance of the course ranging from the current position (POS
Or ID) to the next position (POS ID+1).
50 ~ 60000
If 0, do not check the course ranging from the current position
to the next position.
LAT2 String Latitude position of tracking POS ID+1.
LON2 String Longitude position of tracking POS ID+1.
GAP2 0, meter Tolerance of the course from the current position (POS ID+1) to
50 ~ 60000 the next position (POS ID+2).

If 0, do not check the course ranging from the current position


to the next position.

LAT10 Latitude position of tracking POS ID+9.
LON10 Longitude position of tracking POS ID+9.
GAP10 0, Tolerance of the course ranging from the current position (POS
50 ~ 60000 ID+9) to the next position (POS ID+10).

If 0, do not check the course ranging from the current position


to the next position.
<Example>
[command] ST300STR;100850000;02;1;+22.123456;-0.222222;100;+22.127890;+0. 222333;0
[response] ST300STR;Res;100850000;010;1;+22.123456;-0.222222;100;+22.127890;+0. 222333;0

<Note>

** This Command can cover maximum 10 (ten) geographical positions per command. If there is a very long course
requiring more than 10 positions to be set for the course, the 2 nd Command should be made to cover the 11th
position up to the 20th position. If the course needs more than 20 positions, the way how to set such positions with
the 3rd Command is same as how the 2nd command has set number of the positions.

** If TR_NO_ID is 1, all tracking positions that have already been set to the device will be erased and new
positions starts being set.

5-3. Number of tracking positions

Read carefully the contents and <Example> along with <Note> described in the bottom inside the table below
HDR DEV_ID VER

Field Mark Value Meaning


HDR ST300GTR Command type.
DEV_ID 9 char Device ID.
VER 02 Protocol Version.
<Example>
[command] ST300GTR;100850000;02
[response] ST300GTR;Res;100850000;010;1;1;+22.123456;-0.222222;100;+22.127890;+0. 222333;0
ST300GTR;Res;100850000;010;0;3;+22.133456;-0.222222;100;+22.137890;+0. 222333;0

<Note>
** Response can be divided into several strings; but not into more than 10 positions in each string. Also, a
response sting may be cut if next position starts new route. Response fields are as shown below.
Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document
Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 56 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

HDR RES DEV_ID VER CONT TR_NO_ID LAT1 LON1 GAP1 LAT2 LON2 GAP2

CONT may be 0 or1, When next string is followed, CONT displays with 1. When the string is last, CONT
displays with 0.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 57 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

6. Reporting to server

Once a device is configured properly and registered on its server for operation, it sends reports to the server (or
sends SMS messages to cellular phone whose number is predefined) either in response to the commands made by
the server or as per the way how the device has been configured to respond to its server.

This chapter shows the strings of each report, so that server could understand the contents. One report can be issued
in either of two types, normal string and zip string, both of which are described below.

Also, note that we take an <Example> and make a <Note> on the bottom part of each report in this chapter to help
the users understand better what contents are included in the report. So, it is highly recommended that users should
read the whole parts of the reports very carefully.

Model Identification Table


Model ID
ST300SI 01
ST340 02
ST340LC(4pin) 03
ST300H 04
ST350 05
ST480 06
ST300A 07
ST300R 08
ST300B 09
ST300V 10
ST300C 11
ST300K 12
ST300P 13
ST300F 14
ST300D 16
ST340R 17

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 58 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

6-1. Status Report

This report (Status Report) is sent to the server periodically as defined by user to configure status report if
conditions for issuing the report are met. The following two (2) tables show how one report can be made in 2
different types such as in string and in zip.

ST300B ST300A ST300H ST300R ST300C ST300K


ST340/LC
HDR HDR HDR HDR HDR HDR
DEV_ID DEV_ID DEV_ID DEV_ID DEV_ID DEV_ID
MODEL MODEL MODEL MODEL MODEL MODEL
SW_VER SW_VER SW_VER SW_VER SW_VER SW_VER
DATE DATE DATE DATE DATE DATE
TIME TIME TIME TIME TIME TIME
CELL CELL CELL CELL CELL CELL
LAT LAT LAT LAT LAT LAT
LON LON LON LON LON LON
SPD SPD SPD SPD SPD SPD
CRS CRS CRS CRS CRS CRS
SATT SATT SATT SATT SATT SATT
FIX FIX FIX FIX FIX FIX
DIST DIST DIST DIST DIST DIST
PWR_VOL PWR_VOL
PWR_VOLT PWR_VOLT PWR_VOLT PWR_VOLT
T T
I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O
MODE MODE MODE MODE MODE MODE
MSG_NUM MSG_NUM MSG_NUM MSG_NUM MSG_NUM MSG_NUM
H_METER H_METER H_METER H_METER H_METER H_METER
BCK_VOLT BCK_VOLT BCK_VOLT BCK_VOLT BCK_VOLT BCK_VOLT
MSG_TYP MSG_TYP
MSG_TYPE MSG_TYPE MSG_TYPE MSG_TYPE
E E
TOTAL_COI
ADC RPM ADC ADC ADC
N
MAX_SPD ADC1 DID TO TO
ADC2 DID_REG TF TF
DID OV_SP_RP VS VS
OV_SP_TIM
DID_REG DID
E
TEMPERATUR
SPD_2 DID_REG
E
TEMPERATUR TEMPERATUR
E E
TEMPERATUR TEMPERATUR
E E
TEMPERATUR
OV_SP_RP
E
OV_SP_TIME
SPD_2

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 59 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

300P ST300F ST300V ST300D ST340R


HDR HDR HDR HDR HDR
DEV_ID DEV_ID DEV_ID DEV_ID DEV_ID
MODEL MODEL MODEL MODEL MODEL
SW_VER SW_VER SW_VER SW_VER SW_VER
DATE DATE DATE DATE DATE
TIME TIME TIME TIME TIME
CELL CELL CELL CELL CELL
LAT LAT LAT LAT LAT
LON LON LON LON LON
SPD SPD SPD SPD SPD
CRS CRS CRS CRS CRS
SATT SATT SATT SATT SATT
FIX FIX FIX FIX FIX
DIST DIST DIST DIST DIST
PWR_VOLT PWR_VOLT PWR_VOLT PWR_VOLT PWR_VOLT
I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O
MODE MODE MODE MODE MODE
MSG_NUM MSG_NUM MSG_NUM MSG_NUM MSG_NUM
H_METER H_METER H_METER H_METER H_METER
BCK_VOLT BCK_VOLT BCK_VOLT BCK_VOLT BCK_VOLT
MSG_TYPE MSG_TYPE MSG_TYPE MSG_TYPE MSG_TYPE
TPS_IN ADC ADC ADC
TPS_OUT FUEL1 TLS_IN DID
TPS_S1_IN FUEL2 TLS_OUT DID_REG
TPS_S1_OUT OV_SP_RP
TPS_S2_IN OV_SP_TIME
TPS_S2_OUT SPD_2

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 60 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

6-1-1. Normal

Field Marks Meaning


HDR ST300STT Header of Status Report.
DEV_ID 9 char Device ID.
MODEL 2 char Device Model (According to table model).
SW_VER 3 char Number of the released Software Version.
DATE 8 char GPS date (yyyymmdd)

Year + Month + Day


TIME 8 char. GPS time (hh:mm:ss)

Hour : Minute : Second


CELL String Location Code ID (3 digits hex) + Serving Cell BSIC(2 digits decimal).
LAT String Latitude (+/-xx.xxxxxx).
LON String Longitude (+/-xxx.xxxxxx).
SPD String Speed in km/h

This value returns to 0 when it is higher than 200,000km (kilometers).


CRS String Course on the ground in degree.
SATT String Number of satellites.
FIX 1 or 0 GPS is fixed (1); GPS is not fixed (0).
DIST String Traveled distance in meter

This value returns to 0 when it is higher than 200,000km (kilometers).


PWR_VOLT String Voltage value of the main power.
I/O 6 char Current I/O status of the inputs and the outputs:

Ignition + Input1 + Input 2 + Input 3 + Out1 + Out2.


Ignition: 1 (ON), 0 (OFF).
Input1 ~ Input3: 1 (Ground, Shorted), 0 (Opened).
Out1 ~ Out2: 1 (Active), 0 (Inactive).

In case of ST300V

Ignition + Input1 + Input 2 + Input 3 + Input4 + Out1 + Out2 + Out3.


Ignition: 1 (ON), 0 (OFF).
Input1 ~ Input4: 1 (Ground, Shorted), 0 (Opened).
Out1 ~ Out2: 1 (Active), 0 (Inactive).
MODE 1 char 1 = Parking mode.
2 = Driving Mode.
4 = Distance.
5 = Angle.
MSG_NUM 4 char Message number

After 9999 is reported, message number returns to 0000.


OV_SP_RP String maximum speed in report time (Km/h)
OV_SP_TIME String Time of over speed
SPD_2 String Speed in km/h. Average speed in time report.
H_METER String Driving hour-meter.
BCK_VOLT String Voltage value of backup battery.
MSG_TYPE 1 char Report is real time (1); Report is storage (0).
ADC String Voltage value of ADC (0~30V)
Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document
Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 61 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

ADC1 String Voltage value of ADC1 (0~5V)


ADC2 String Voltage value of ADC2 (0~5V)
RPM String Current RPM
TO String Odometer in Km/h
TF String Total fuel used by Lts
VS String Vehicle Speed by Km/h
DID 14 char. Driver ID (inserted I-button ID )
DID_REG 1 char. State of DIDs registration

0 = not registered. 1 = registered.


TPS_IN Total number of people on the bus. Initialized when ignition is OFF.
If TPS_S1_IN, TPS_S1_OUT, TPS_S2_IN, TPS_S2_OUT fields are
occurred, these fields are initialized only command.
TPS_OUT Total number of people out of the bus. Initialized when ignition is OFF.
If TPS_S1_IN, TPS_S1_OUT, TPS_S2_IN, TPS_S2_OUT fields are
occurred, these fields are initialized only command.
FUEL1 4 char Level of Fuel Sensor 1.
Unit: Millimeter
If fuel sensor type is Omnicomm, it is raw values.
FUEL2 4 char Level of Fuel Sensor 2 (Millimeter)
Unit: Millimeter
If fuel sensor type is Omnicomm, it is raw values.
TEMPERATURE string The Sensor ID & Temperature
TEMPERATURE string The Sensor ID & Temperature
TEMPERATURE string The Sensor ID & Temperature
TOTAL_COIN String Total coin value. This value will be reset to 0 when Ignition OFF is
made.
TLS_IN Total number of people on the bus. Initialized when ignition is OFF.
TLS_OUT Total number of people out of the bus. Initialized when ignition is OFF.
MAX_SPD String Speed in km/h

Maximum speed between before STT report and current STT report.
TPS_S1_IN The number of people riding on the bus to counting by sensor 1.
Initialized only command.
TPS_S1_OUT The number of people get off the bus to counting by sensor 1.
Initialized only command.
TPS_S2_IN The number of people riding on the bus to counting by sensor 2.
Initialized only command.
TPS_S2_OUT Number of people get out the bus to counting by sensor 2.
Initialized only command.
<Examples>

ST300
ST300STT;100850000;01;010;20081017;07:41:56;00100;+37.478519;+126.886819;000.012;000.00;9;1;0;15.3
0;001100;1;0072;0;4.5;1

ST300B(Supported Coin Machine)


ST300STT;100850000;09;010;20081017;07:41:56;00100;+37.478519;+126.886819;000.012;000.00;9;1;0;15.3
0;001100;1;0072;0;4.5;1;0000000000

ST300B(Can get a maximum speed between each STT report)


ST300STT;100850000;09;010;20081017;07:41:56;00100;+37.478519;+126.886819;000.012;000.00;9;1;0;15.3
0;001100;1;0072;0;4.5;1;000.012

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 62 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

ST300V
ST300STT;100850000;10;010;20081017;07:41:56;00100;+37.478519;+126.886819;000.012;000.00;9;1;0;15.3
0;00110000;1;0072;0;4.5;1;12.35;0;0

ST300A
The following string should be created if user of the ST300A does NOT use the optional
function of temperature sensing.

ST300STT;205989898;07;635;20150902;09:08:16;01454;+37.479300;+126.887852;000.011;000.00;8;1;0;12.2
5;000000;1;0000;000.083;0;000218;0.0;0;0.00;4.23;4.26;012497F1160000;1;000.047

The following string should be created if user of the ST300A selects the optional function
of temperature sensing and uses 3 units of the temperature sensor.

ST300STT;205989898;07;635;20150902;09:08:16;01454;+37.479300;+126.887852;000.011;000.00;8;1;0;12.2
5;000000;1;0000;000.083;0;000218;0.0;0;0.00;4.23;4.26;012497F1160000;1;28E4D95F060000D5:+23.5;28F5
573B050000AA:+23.8;28BBE721050000A0:+24.3;000.047

The following string should be created if user of the ST300A selects the optional function
of temperature sensing and uses 2 units of the temperature sensor.
ST300STT;205989898;07;635;20150902;09:08:16;01454;+37.479300;+126.887852;000.011;000.00;8;1;0;12.2
5;000000;1;0000;000.083;0;000218;0.0;0;0.00;4.23;4.26;012497F1160000;1;28E4D95F060000D5:+23.5;28F5
573B050000AA:+23.8;:;000.047

The following string should be created if user of the ST300A selects the optional function
of temperature sensing and uses only one (1) unit of the temperature sensor.

ST300STT;205989898;07;635;20150902;09:08:16;01454;+37.479300;+126.887852;000.011;000.00;8;1;0;12.2
5;000000;1;0000;000.083;000218;0.0;0;0.00;4.23;4.26;012497F1160000;1;28E4D95F060000D5:+23.5;:;:;0;00
0.047

ST300H
ST300STT;205787852;04;639;20150903;05:19:20;01454;+37.479322;+126.887835;000.000;000.00;10;1;1;12.
43;000000;1;0001;000266;0.0;1;0;012497F1160000;1;000.180;0;000.037

ST300C
ST300STT;600850802;11;999;20141212;09:47:21;04600;+37.479370;+126.888552;000.120;000.00;3;1;10660;
12.25;000000;2;0036;002068;0.0;1;3.10;302799;0.00;215.86

ST300K
The following string should be created if user of the ST300K does NOT use the optional function
of the temperature sensor.

ST300STT;600850779;12;560;20150501;02:28:22;01454;+37.479307;+126.887838;000.002;000.00;10;1;17;13
.54;100000;2;0026;001410;0.0;1;0.00;0;0.00;0.00;01488BF1160000;0

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 63 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

The following string should be created if user of the ST300K selects the optional function of
temperature sensing and uses the 3 temperature sensors
ST300STT;600850779;12;560;20150501;02:28:22;01454;+37.479307;+126.887838;000.002;000.00;10;1;17;13
.54;100000;2;0026;001410;0.0;1;0.00;0;0.00;0.00;01488BF1160000;0;28E4D95F060000D5:+23.5;28F5573B0
50000AA:+23.8;28BBE721050000A0:+24.3

The following string should be created if user of the ST300K selects the optional function
of temperature sensing and uses 2 temperature sensors.
ST300STT;600850779;12;560;20150501;02:28:22;01454;+37.479307;+126.887838;000.002;000.00;10;1;17;13
.54;100000;2;0026;001410;0.0;1;0.00;0;0.00;0.00;01488BF1160000;0;28E4D95F060000D5:+23.5;28F5573B0
50000AA:+23.8;:

The following string should be created if user of the ST300A selects the optional function
of temperature sensing and uses only one (1) temperature sensor.
ST300STT;600850779;12;560;20150501;02:28:22;01454;+37.479307;+126.887838;000.002;000.00;10;1;17;13
.54;100000;2;0026;001410;0.0;1;0.00;0;0.00;0.00;01488BF1160000;0;28E4D95F060000D5:+23.5;:;:

ST300P
ST300STT;205123456;13;430;20141222;01:58:24;01454;+37.479530;+126.887844;000.000;000.00;5;1;8;12.1
4;10110000;2;0002;000046;0.0;0;10;3

ST300P(Supported extra TPS fields)


ST300STT;205123456;13;430;20141222;01:58:24;01454;+37.479530;+126.887844;000.000;000.00;5;1;8;12.1
4;10110000;2;0002;000046;0.0;0;10;3;5;2;5;1

ST300F
ST300STT;600850805;14;453;20141222;03:01:49;01454;+37.479497;+126.887838;000.041;000.00;8;1;47;13.
33;000000;1;0003;000320;0.0;1;0.00;0338;0336

ST300D
ST300STT;205858552;16;637;20150902;11:06:52;01454;+37.479315;+126.887838;000.011;000.00;11;1;0;12.
00;000000;1;0001;000016;0.0;1;0.00;0155751F170000;1;000.120;0;000.027

ST340R
ST300STT;205124563;17;605;20150717;01:30:52;01454;+37.479324;+126.887843;000.037;000.00;9;1;0;12.2
5;000000;1;0002;000012;0.0;1

<Note>
Some fields written at the end of the report would be different. It depends on model of the GPS device (the
ST300 Series) of Suntech, for example,

The RPM is included in STT on ST300H.

The DID/DID_REG is included in STT only on ST300H, ST300A, ST300K and ST300D.

TO, TF and VS are included in STT only on ST300C or ST300K.

FUEL1 and FUEL2 are included in STT only on ST300F.

The TEMPERATURE is included in STT only on ST300A and ST300K. If a device (e.g. ST300A or
ST300K) has 2 temperature sensors which are not connected to it, the last 2 fields of the string should
be filled with 2 colons as shown below.
Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document
Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 64 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

ST300STT;100850000;01;010;20081017;07:41:56;00100;+37.478519;+126.886819;000.012;000.00;9;1;0;15.3
0;001100;1;0072;0;4.5;1;012497F1160000;1;3.75;4.21;28E4D95F060000D5:+23.5;:;:

The TEMPERATURE is included in STT only on ST300A and ST300K. If a device (e.g. ST300A or
ST300K) has 1 temperature sensor which is not connected to it, the last field of the string should be
filled with 1 colon as shown below.

ST300STT;100850000;01;010;20081017;07:41:56;00100;+37.478519;+126.886819;000.012;000.00;9;1;0;15.3
0;001100;1;0072;0;4.5;1;012497F1160000;1;3.75;4.21;28E4D95F060000D5:+23.5;28BBE721050000A0:+24.3
;:
The OV_SP_RP, OV_SP_TIME and SPD_2 are included in STT only on ST300A, ST300D and
ST300H.

The TOTAL_COIN is included in STT only on ST300B to supported CoinMachine.

The MAX_SPD is included in STT only on ST300B can get a maximum speed between each STT
report

The TPS_S1_IN, TPS_S1_OUT, TPS_S2_IN, TPS_S2_OUT are included in STT only on


ST300P, which one is supported extra TPS fields.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 65 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

6-1-2. Zip

Field Marks Meaning


STX 0x02 Start of zip data.
PKT_LEN 2 bytes Length of zip data, excluding STX, PKT_LEN and ETX.
HDR 0x10 Header of Status Report.
DEV_ID 5 bytes Device ID

BCD format.

If the Device ID is 123456789, this field will be filled with 0x12, 0x34, 0x56
0x78 and 0x90.
MODEL 1byte Device Model (According to table model).
SW_VER 2 bytes Software Version.
DATE_TIME 6 bytes GPS date & Time (Year + Month + Day + Hour + Minute + Second).
CELL 3 bytes Location Code ID (2 bytes) + Serving Cell BSIC (1 byte).
LAT 4 bytes 1 byte (integer) + 3 bytes (BCD).
LON 4 bytes 1 byte (integer) + 3 bytes (BCD).
SPD 3 bytes 2 bytes (integer) + 1 byte (BCD).
CRS 3 bytes 2 bytes (integer) + 1 byte (BCD).
SATT_FIX 1 byte
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 ~ Bit 0
Fix Latitude Longitude Satellites count
+/- sign +/- sign
+ sign = 0, - sign = 1.

DIST 4 bytes Traveled distance in meter.


PWR_VOLT 2 bytes Voltage value of the main power

1 byte (integer) + 1 byte (decimal, BCD)


I/O 1 byte
Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Out 2 Out1 Input 3 Input 2 Input1 Ignition
Ignition: 1 (ON), 0 (OFF).
Input1 ~ Input3: 1 (Ground, Shorted), 0 (Opened).
Out1 ~ Out2: 1 (Active), 0 (Inactive).

In case of ST300V
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Out 3 Out2 Out1 In 4 In 3 In 2 In 1 Ignition
Ignition: 1 (ON), 0 (OFF).
Input1 ~ Input4: 1 (Ground, Shorted), 0 (Opened).
Out1 ~ Out3: 1 (Active), 0 (Inactive).
MODE 1 byte 1 = Parking mode.
2 = Driving Mode.
4 = Distance.
5 = Angle.
MSG_NUM 2 bytes Message number.

After 9999, the message number returns to 0.


OV_SP_RP 3 bytes 2 bytes (integer) + 1 byte (BCD)
OV_SP_TIME 4 bytes Time of over speed(integer)
SPD_2 3 bytes 2 bytes (integer) + 1 byte (BCD)
H_METER 4 bytes Driving hour-meter.
Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document
Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 66 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

BCK_VOLT 2 bytes Voltage value of backup battery

1 byte (integer) + 1 byte (decimal, BCD)


MSG_TYPE 1 byte Report is real time (1); Report is storage (0).
ADC 2 bytes Voltage value of ADC1. (0~30V)

1 byte (integer) + 1 byte (decimal, BCD)


ADC1 2 bytes Voltage value of ADC1. (0~5V)

1 byte (integer) + 1 byte (decimal, BCD)


ADC2 2 bytes Voltage value of ADC2. (0~5V)

1 byte (integer) + 1 byte (decimal, BCD)


RPM 2 bytes Current RPM
TO 4 bytes Odometer by Km/h(4bytes(integer))
TF 5 bytes Total fuel used by Lts (4 bytes (integer) + 1byte(BCD))
VS 3 bytes Vehicle Speed by Km/h (2 bytes (integer)+1byte(BCD))
DID 7 bytes Driver ID (inserted I-button ID )
DID_REG 1 byte State of DIDs registration

0 = not registered. 1 = registered.


TPS_IN 2 bytes Total number of people on the bus. Initialized when ignition is OFF.
If TPS_S1_IN, TPS_S1_OUT, TPS_S2_IN, TPS_S2_OUT fields are
occurred, these fields are initialized only command.
TPS_OUT 2 bytes Total number of people out of the bus. Initialized when ignition is OFF.
If TPS_S1_IN, TPS_S1_OUT, TPS_S2_IN, TPS_S2_OUT fields are
occurred, these fields are initialized only command.
FUEL1 2 bytes Level of Fuel Sensor 1

2 bytes (integer), MSB


FUEL2 2 bytes Level of Fuel Sensor 2

2 bytes (integer), MSB


TEMPERATURE 10 bytes The Sensor ID(8bytes) & Temperature(2bytes) (*Please refer to
Appendices 10.1)
TEMPERATURE 10 bytes The Sensor ID(8bytes) & Temperature(2bytes) (*Please refer to
Appendices 10.1)
TEMPERATURE 10 bytes The Sensor ID(8bytes) & Temperature(2bytes) (*Please refer to
Appendices 10.1)
TLS_IN 2 bytes Total number of people on the bus. Initialized when ignition is OFF.
TLS_OUT 2 bytes Total number of people out of the bus. Initialized when ignition is OFF.
TOTAL_COIN 4 bytes Total coin value. This value will be reset to 0 when Ignition OFF is
made.

4 bytes(integer)
MAX_SPD 3 bytes 2 bytes (integer) + 1 byte (BCD).
TPS_S1_IN 2 bytes The number of people riding on the bus to counting by sensor 1.
Initialized only command.
TPS_S1_OUT 2 bytes The number of people get off the bus to counting by sensor 1.
Initialized only command.
TPS_S2_IN 2 bytes The number of people riding on the bus to counting by sensor 2.
Initialized only command.
TPS_S2_OUT 2 bytes Number of people get out the bus to counting by sensor 2.
Initialized only command.
Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document
Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 67 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

ETX 0x03 End of zip data.


<Example>

Original String :
ST300STT;100850001;01;010;20081017;07:41:56;2F100;+37.478519;+126.886819;032.512;000.00;9;1;500;15
.30;001100;1;0072;2000;4.5;1;1750;012497F1160000;1

Zip Packet

Filed name Zip data Comment with string data


STX 0x02
PKT_LEN 0x00 0x3c
HDR 0x10 ST300STT
DEV_ID 0x10 0x08 0x50 0x00 0x10 100850001, BCD, MSB
MODEL 0x01 01
SW_VER 0x00 0x0a 010
DATE_TIME 0x08 0x0a 0x11 0x07 0x29 0x38 20081017;07:41:56
CELL 0x02 0xF1 0x00 2F100, BCD, MSB
LAT 0x25 0x47 0x85 0x19 +37.478519, Decimal part is BCD
LON 0x7e 0x88 0x68 0x19 +126.886819, Decimal part is BCD
SPD 0x00 0x20 0x51 032.512. Convert to 032.51
Decimal part is BCD, MSB
CRS 0x00 0x00 0x00 000.00, Decimal part is BCD, MSB
SATT_FIX 0x89 GPS fixed. Cell count = 9.
Lat. & Lon. sign = plus
DIST 0x00 0x00 0x01 0xF4 500. MSB
PWR_VOLT 0x0F 0x30 15.30. Decimal part is BCD, MSB
I/O 0x0c 001100
MODE 0x01 1
MSG_NUM 0x00 0x48 0072, MSB
H_METER 0x00 0x00 0x07 0xD0 2000, MSB
BCK_VOLT 0x04 0x50 4.5, Decimal part is BCD
MSG_TYPE 0x01 1
RPM 0x06 0xD6 1750, MSB
DID 0x01 0x24 0x97 0xF1 0x16 0x00 0x00 012497F1160000
DID_REG 0x01 1
ETX 0x03

<Note>
Some fields at the end of the report would be different. It depends on model name of ST300 Series, for
example,

The RPM is included in STT in ST300H.


The DID/DID_REG is included in STT only in ST300H, 300A, ST300K and ST300D.
TO, TF and VS are included in STT only in ST300C or ST300K.
FUEL1 and FUEL2 are included in STT only in ST300F.
The TEPERATURE is included in STT only in ST300A and ST300K.
The OV_SP_RP, OV_SP_TIME and SPD_2 are included in STT only in ST300A, ST300D and
ST300H.
The TOTAL_COIN is included in STT only on ST300B to supported CoinMachine.

The MAX_SPD is included in STT only on ST300B can get a maximum speed between each STT
report

The TPS_S1_IN, TPS_S1_OUT, TPS_S2_IN, TPS_S2_OUT are included in STT only on


ST300P, which one is supported extra TPS fields.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 68 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

6-2. Emergency Report

When an emergency occurs, device sends to the server this emergency report as defined already in the course of
configuring device.

ST300 ST300A ST300H ST300R ST300C ST300K


ST340/LC
HDR HDR HDR HDR HDR HDR
DEV_ID DEV_ID DEV_ID DEV_ID DEV_ID DEV_ID
MODEL MODEL MODEL MODEL MODEL MODEL
SW_VER SW_VER SW_VER SW_VER SW_VER SW_VER
DATE DATE DATE DATE DATE DATE
TIME TIME TIME TIME TIME TIME
CELL CELL CELL CELL CELL CELL
LAT LAT LAT LAT LAT LAT
LON LON LON LON LON LON
SPD SPD SPD SPD SPD SPD
CRS CRS CRS CRS CRS CRS
SATT SATT SATT SATT SATT SATT
FIX FIX FIX FIX FIX FIX
DIST DIST DIST DIST DIST DIST
PWR_VOLT PWR_VOLT PWR_VOLT PWR_VOLT PWR_VOLT PWR_VOLT
I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O
EMG_ID EMG_ID EMG_ID EMG_ID EMG_ID EMG_ID
H_METER H_METER H_METER H_METER H_METER H_METER
BCK_VOLT BCK_VOLT BCK_VOLT BCK_VOLT BCK_VOLT BCK_VOLT
MSG_TYPE MSG_TYPE MSG_TYPE MSG_TYPE MSG_TYPE MSG_TYPE
ADC RPM ADC ADC ADC
ADC1 DID TO TO
ADC2 DID_REG TF TF
DID SPD_2 VS VS
DID_REG DID
SPD_2 DID_REG

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 69 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

300P 300F ST300V ST300D ST340R


HDR HDR HDR HDR HDR
DEV_ID DEV_ID DEV_ID DEV_ID DEV_ID
MODEL MODEL MODEL MODEL MODEL
SW_VER SW_VER SW_VER SW_VER SW_VER
DATE DATE DATE DATE DATE
TIME TIME TIME TIME TIME
CELL CELL CELL CELL CELL
LAT LAT LAT LAT LAT
LON LON LON LON LON
SPD SPD SPD SPD SPD
CRS CRS CRS CRS CRS
SATT SATT SATT SATT SATT
FIX FIX FIX FIX FIX
DIST DIST DIST DIST DIST
PWR_VOLT PWR_VOLT PWR_VOLT PWR_VOLT PWR_VOLT
I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O
EMG_ID EMG_ID EMG_ID EMG_ID EMG_ID
H_METER H_METER H_METER H_METER H_METER
BCK_VOLT BCK_VOLT BCK_VOLT BCK_VOLT BCK_VOLT
MSG_TYPE MSG_TYPE MSG_TYPE MSG_TYPE MSG_TYPE
TPS_IN ADC ADC ADC
TPS_OUT FUEL1 TLS_IN DID
TPS_S1_IN FUEL2 TLS_OUT DID_REG
TPS_S1_OUT SPD_2
TPS_S2_IN
TPS_S2_OUT

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 70 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

6-2-1. Normal

Field Marks Meaning


HDR ST300EMG Header of Status Report.
DEV_ID 9 char Device ID.
MODEL 2 char Device Model (According to table model).
SW_VER 3 char Software Version.
DATE 8 char GPS date (yyyymmdd).
TIME 8 char GPS time (hh:mm:ss).
CELL String Location Code ID(3 digits hex) + Serving Cell BSIC(2 digits decimal).
LAT String Latitude (+/-xx.xxxxxx).
LON String Longitude (+/-xxx.xxxxxx).
SPD String Speed in km/h.
CRS String Course over ground in degree.
SATT String Number of satellites.
FIX 1 or 0 GPS is fixed (1); GPS is not fixed (0).
DIST String Traveled distance in meter.
PWR_VOLT String Voltage value of main power.
I/O 6 char Current I/O status of inputs and outputs.

Ignition + Input1 + Input 2 + Input 3 + Out1 + Out2.


Ignition: 1 (ON), 0 (OFF).
Input1 ~ Input3: 1 (Ground, Shorted), 0 (Opened).
Out1 ~ Out2: 1 (Active), 0 (Inactive).

In case of ST300V
Ignition + Input1 + Input 2 + Input 3 + Input4 + Out1 + Out2 + Out3.
Ignition: 1 (ON), 0 (OFF).
Input1 ~ Input4: 1 (Ground, Shorted), 0 (Opened).
Out1 ~ Out3: 1 (Active), 0 (Inactive).
EMG_ID 1 char Emergency type

1 = emergency by panic button.


2 = emergency by parking lock.
3 = emergency by removing main power.
Its only available on the device model which has a backup battery.

5 = emergency by anti-theft.
6 = emergency by anti-theft door.
7 = emergency by motion.
8 = emergency by anti-theft shock.
SPD_2 String Speed in km/h. Average speed in time report.
H_METER String Driving hour-meter.
BCK_VOLT String Voltage value of backup battery.
MSG_TYPE 1 char Report is real time (1); Report is storage (0).
ADC String Voltage value of ADC (0~30V)
ADC1 String Voltage value of ADC1 (0~5V)
ADC2 String Voltage value of ADC2 (0~5V)
RPM String Current RPM
TO String Odometer in Km/h
TF String Total fuel used by Lts
VS String Vehicle Speed by Km/h
DID 14 char. Driver ID (inserted I-button ID )
Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document
Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 71 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

DID_REG 1 char. State of DIDs registration

0 = not registered. 1 = registered.


TPS_IN Total number of people on the bus. Initialized when ignition is OFF.
If TPS_S1_IN, TPS_S1_OUT, TPS_S2_IN, TPS_S2_OUT fields are
occurred, these fields are initialized only command.
TPS_OUT Total number of people out of the bus. Initialized when ignition is OFF.
If TPS_S1_IN, TPS_S1_OUT, TPS_S2_IN, TPS_S2_OUT fields are
occurred, these fields are initialized only command.
FUEL1 4 char Level of Fuel Sensor 1.
Unit: Millimeter
If fuel sensor type is Omnicomm, it is raw values.
FUEL2 4 char Level of Fuel Sensor 2 (Millimeter)
Unit: Millimeter
If fuel sensor type is Omnicomm, it is raw values.
TLS_IN Total number of people on the bus. Initialized when ignition is OFF.
TLS_OUT Total number of people out of the bus. Initialized when ignition is OFF.
TPS_S1_IN The number of people riding on the bus to counting by sensor 1.
Initialized only command.
TPS_S1_OUT The number of people get off the bus to counting by sensor 1.
Initialized only command.
TPS_S2_IN The number of people riding on the bus to counting by sensor 2.
Initialized only command.
TPS_S2_OUT Number of people get out the bus to counting by sensor 2.
Initialized only command.
<Example>

ST300
ST300EMG;100850000;01;010;20081017;07:41:56;00100;+37.478519;+126.886819;000.012;000.00;9;1;0;15.3
0;001100;1;0;4.5;1

ST300V
ST300EMG;100850000;10;010;20081017;07:41:56;00100;+37.478519;+126.886819;000.012;000.00;9;1;0;15.3
0;00110000;1;0;4.5;1;12.35;0;0

ST300A
ST300EMG;205989898;07;630;20150902;03:04:08;01454;+37.479320;+126.887834;000.011;000.00;12;1;1;12.
21;110000;1;000057;0.0;1;0.00;4.24;4.27;012497F1160000;1;000.035

ST300H
ST300EMG;205787852;04;639;20150903;05:20:13;01454;+37.479322;+126.887834;000.000;000.00;12;1;1;12.
43;010000;1;000266;0.0;1;0;012497F1160000;1;000.055

ST300C
ST300EMG;100850000;11;010;20081017;07:41:56;00100;+37.478519;+126.886819;000.012;000.00;9;1;0;15.3
0;001100;1;0;4.5;1;3.10;302799;0.00;215.86

ST300K
ST300EMG;100850000;12;010;20081017;07:41:56;00100;+37.478519;+126.886819;000.012;000.00;9;1;0;15.3
0;001100;1;0;4.5;1;1750;3.10;302799;0.00;215.86;012497F1160000;1

ST300P
ST300EMG;205123456;13;430;20141222;01:59:35;01454;+37.479801;+126.887904;000.357;000.00;5;1;108;1
2.14;11110000;1;000047;0.0;0;10;3
Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document
Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 72 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

ST300P(Supported extra TPS fields)


ST300EMG;205123456;13;430;20141222;01:59:35;01454;+37.479801;+126.887904;000.357;000.00;5;1;108;1
2.14;11110000;1;000047;0.0;0;10;3;5;2;5;1

ST300F
ST300EMG;600850805;14;453;20141222;04:16:15;01454;+37.479612;+126.888632;000.041;000.00;6;1;0;13.3
3;001100;1;000320;0.0;0;0.00;0336;0238

ST300D
ST300EMG;205858552;16;637;20150902;11:10:11;01454;+37.479317;+126.887840;000.009;000.00;11;1;0;12.
00;010000;1;000016;0.0;1;0.00;0155751F170000;1;000.060

ST340R
ST300EMG;205124563;17;605;20150717;01:57:38;01454;+37.479310;+126.887854;000.011;000.00;8;1;1;13.8
2;110000;1;000016;0.0;0

<Note>
Emergency reports are sent A1 times until the device receives an Acknowledgement Response from its server.

Some fields at the end of the report would be different. It depends on device model. For example,

The RPM is included in EMG in ST300H.


The DID/DID_REG is included in EMG only in ST300H, 300A, ST300K and ST300D.
TO, TF and VS are included in EMG only in ST300C or ST300K.
FUEL1 and FUEL2 are included in EMG only in ST300F.
The SPD_2 is included in EMG in ST300A, ST300D and ST300H.
The TPS_S1_IN, TPS_S1_OUT, TPS_S2_IN, TPS_S2_OUT are included in EMG only on
ST300P, which one is supported extra TPS fields.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 73 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

6-2-2. Zip

Field Marks Meaning


STX 0x02 Start of zip data.
PKT_LEN 2 bytes Length of zip data, excluding STX, PKT_LEN and ETX.
HDR 0x11 Header of Emergency Report.
DEV_ID 5 bytes Device ID:
BCD format.
If the Device ID is 123456789, this field will be filled with 0x12, 0x34, 0x56
0x78 and 0x90.
MODEL 1byte Device Model (According to table model).
SW_VER 2 bytes Software Version.
DATE_TIME 6 bytes GPS date & Time (Year + Month + Day + Hour + Minute + Second).
CELL 3 bytes Location Code ID (2 Bytes) + Serving Cell BSIC (1 Byte).
LAT 4 bytes 1 byte (integer) + 3 bytes (BCD).
LON 4 bytes 1 byte (integer) + 3 bytes (BCD).
SPD 3 bytes 2 bytes (integer) + 1 byte (BCD).
CRS 3 bytes 2 bytes (integer) + 1 byte (BCD).
SATT_FIX 1 byte
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 ~ Bit 0
Fix Latitude Longitude Satellites count
+/- sign +/- sign
+ sign = 0, - sign = 1.
DIST 4 bytes Traveled distance in meter.
PWR_VOLT 2bytes Voltage value of the main power:
1 byte (integer) + 1 byte (decimal, BCD)
I/O 1 byte
Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Out 2 Out1 Input 3 Input 2 Input1 Ignition
Ignition: 1 (ON), 0 (OFF).
Input1 ~ Input3: 1 (Ground, Shorted), 0 (Opened).
Out1 ~ Out2: 1 (Active), 0 (Inactive).

In case of ST300V

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0


Out 3 Out2 Out1 In 4 In 3 In 2 In 1 Ignition
Ignition: 1 (ON), 0 (OFF).
Input1 ~ Input4: 1 (Ground, Shorted), 0 (Opened).
Out1 ~ Out3: 1 (Active), 0 (Inactive).
EMG_ID 1 byte Emergency type:

1 = emergency by panic button.


2 = emergency by parking lock.
3 = emergency by removing the main power.
5 = emergency by anti-theft.
6 = emergency by anti-theft door
7 = emergency by motion
8 = emergency by anti-theft shock
SPD_2 3 bytes 2 bytes (integer) + 1 byte (BCD)
H_METER 4bytes Driving hour-meter.
BCK_VOLT 2bytes Voltage value of backup battery

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 74 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

1 byte (integer) + 1 byte (decimal, BCD)


MSG_TYPE 1 byte Report is real time (1); Report is storage (0).
ADC 2 bytes Voltage value of ADC1. (0~30V)

1 byte (integer) + 1 byte (decimal, BCD)


ADC1 2 bytes Voltage value of ADC1. (0~5V)

1 byte (integer) + 1 byte (decimal, BCD)


ADC2 2 bytes Voltage value of ADC2. (0~5V)

1 byte (integer) + 1 byte (decimal, BCD)


RPM 2 bytes Current RPM
TO 4 bytes Odometer by Km/h(4bytes(integer))
TF 5 bytes Total fuel used by Lts(4bytes(integer) + 1byte(BCD))
VS 3bytes Vehicle Speed by Km/h(2bytes(integer)+1byte(BCD))
DID 7 byte Driver ID (inserted I-button ID )
DID_REG 1 byte State of DIDs registration

0 = not registered. 1 = registered.


TPS_IN 2 bytes Total number of people on the bus. Initialized when ignition is OFF.
If TPS_S1_IN, TPS_S1_OUT, TPS_S2_IN, TPS_S2_OUT fields are
occurred, these fields are initialized only command.
TPS_OUT 2 bytes Total number of people out of the bus. Initialized when ignition is OFF.
If TPS_S1_IN, TPS_S1_OUT, TPS_S2_IN, TPS_S2_OUT fields are
occurred, these fields are initialized only command.
FUEL1 2 bytes Level of Fuel Sensor 1

2 bytes (integer), MSB


FUEL2 2 bytes Level of Fuel Sensor 2

2 bytes (integer), MSB


TLS_IN 2 bytes Total number of people on the bus. Initialized when ignition is OFF.
TLS_OUT 2 bytes Total number of people out of the bus. Initialized when ignition is OFF.
TPS_S1_IN 2 bytes The number of people riding on the bus to counting by sensor 1.
Initialized only command.
TPS_S1_OUT 2 bytes The number of people get off the bus to counting by sensor 1.
Initialized only command.
TPS_S2_IN 2 bytes The number of people riding on the bus to counting by sensor 2.
Initialized only command.
TPS_S2_OUT 2 bytes Number of people get out the bus to counting by sensor 2.
Initialized only command.
ETX 0x03 End of zip data.
<Example>
Original String :
ST300EMG;100850001;01;010;20081017;07:41:56;2F100;+37.478519;+126.886819;032.512;000.00;9;1;500;1
5.30;001100;1;2000;4.5;1;1750;012497F1160000;1

Zip Packet

Filed name Zip data Comment with string data


STX 0x02 Comment
PKT_LEN 0x00 0x42
HDR 0x11 ST300EMG
DEV_ID 0x10 0x08 0x50 0x00 0x10 100850001, BCD, MSB

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 75 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

MODEL 0x01 01
SW_VER 0x00 0x0A 010
DATE_TIME 0x08 0x0a 0x11 0x07 0x29 0x38 20081017;07:41:56
CELL 0x02 0xF1 0x00 2F100, BCD, MSB
LAT 0x25 0x47 0x85 0x19 +37.478519, Decimal part is BCD
LON 0x7e 0x88 0x68 0x19 +126.886819, Decimal part is BCD
SPD 0x00 0x20 0x51 032.512. Convert to 032.51
Decimal part is BCD, MSB
CRS 0x00 0x00 0x00 000.00, Decimal part is BCD, MSB
SATT_FIX 0x89 GPS fixed. Cell count = 9.
Lat. & Lon. sign = plus
DIST 0x00 0x00 0x01 0xF4 500. MSB
PWR_VOLT 0x0F 0x30 15.30. Decimal part is BCD, MSB
I/O 0x0c 001100
EMG_ID 0x01 1
H_METER 0x00 0x00 0x07 0xD0 2000, MSB
BCK_VOLT 0x04 0x50 4.5, Decimal part is BCD
MSG_TYPE 0x01 1
RPM 0x06, 0xD6 1750, MSB
DID 0x01 0x24 0x97 0xF1 0x16 0x00 0x00 012497F1160000
DID_REG 0x01 1
ETX 0x03
<Note>
Emergency reports are sent A1 times until the device receives an Acknowledgement response from its server.

Some fields located in the end part of the report would be different. It depends on model. For example,
The RPM is included in EMG in ST300H.
The DID/DID_REG is included in EMG only in ST300H, 300A, ST300K and ST300D.
TO, TF and VS are included in EMG only in ST300C or ST300K.
FUEL1 and FUEL2 are included in EMG only in ST300F.
The SPD_2 is included in EMG in ST300A, ST300D and ST300H.
The TPS_S1_IN, TPS_S1_OUT, TPS_S2_IN, TPS_S2_OUT are included in EMG only on
ST300P, which one is supported extra TPS fields.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 76 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

6-3. Event Report

When an emergency occurs, device sends to the server this event report as defined already in the course of
configuring the device. The following tables show a sample of the event report which is sent to the server if Input
Line is changed.

ST300 ST300A ST300H ST300R ST300C ST300K


ST340/LC
HDR HDR HDR HDR HDR HDR
DEV_ID DEV_ID DEV_ID DEV_ID DEV_ID DEV_ID
MODEL MODEL MODEL MODEL MODEL MODEL
SW_VER SW_VER SW_VER SW_VER SW_VER SW_VER
DATE DATE DATE DATE DATE DATE
TIME TIME TIME TIME TIME TIME
CELL CELL CELL CELL CELL CELL
LAT LAT LAT LAT LAT LAT
LON LON LON LON LON LON
SPD SPD SPD SPD SPD SPD
CRS CRS CRS CRS CRS CRS
SATT SATT SATT SATT SATT SATT
FIX FIX FIX FIX FIX FIX
DIST DIST DIST DIST DIST DIST
PWR_VOLT PWR_VOLT PWR_VOLT PWR_VOLT PWR_VOLT PWR_VOLT
I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O
EVT_ID EVT_ID EVT_ID EVT_ID EVT_ID EVT_ID
H_METER H_METER H_METER H_METER H_METER H_METER
BCK_VOLT BCK_VOLT BCK_VOLT BCK_VOLT BCK_VOLT BCK_VOLT
MSG_TYPE MSG_TYPE MSG_TYPE MSG_TYPE MSG_TYPE MSG_TYPE
ADC RPM ADC ADC ADC
ADC1 DID TO TO
ADC2 DID_REG TF TF
DID SPD_2 VS VS
DID_REG DID
SPD_2 DID_REG

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 77 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

ST300P ST300F ST300V ST300D ST340R


HDR HDR HDR HDR HDR
DEV_ID DEV_ID DEV_ID DEV_ID DEV_ID
MODEL MODEL MODEL MODEL MODEL
SW_VER SW_VER SW_VER SW_VER SW_VER
DATE DATE DATE DATE DATE
TIME TIME TIME TIME TIME
CELL CELL CELL CELL CELL
LAT LAT LAT LAT LAT
LON LON LON LON LON
SPD SPD SPD SPD SPD
CRS CRS CRS CRS CRS
SATT SATT SATT SATT SATT
FIX FIX FIX FIX FIX
DIST DIST DIST DIST DIST
PWR_VOLT PWR_VOLT PWR_VOLT PWR_VOLT PWR_VOLT
I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O
EVT_ID EVT_ID EVT_ID EVT_ID EVT_ID
H_METER H_METER H_METER H_METER H_METER
BCK_VOLT BCK_VOLT BCK_VOLT BCK_VOLT BCK_VOLT
MSG_TYPE MSG_TYPE MSG_TYPE MSG_TYPE MSG_TYPE
TPS_IN ADC ADC ADC
TPS_OUT FUEL1 TLS_IN DID
TPS_S1_IN FUEL2 TLS_OUT DID_REG
TPS_S1_OUT SPD_2
TPS_S2_IN
TPS_S2_OUT

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 78 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

6-3-1. Normal

Field Marks Meaning


HDR ST300EVT Event report header.
DEV_ID 9 char Device ID.
MODEL 2 char Device Model (According to table model).
SW_VER 3 char Software Version.
DATE 8 char GPS date (yyyymmdd).
TIME 8 char GPS time (hh:mm:ss).
CELL String Location Code ID(3 digits hex) + Serving Cell BSIC(2 digits decimal).
LAT String Latitude (+/-xx.xxxxxx).
LON String Longitude (+/-xxx.xxxxxx).
SPD String Speed in km/h.
CRS String Course over ground in degree.
SATT String Number of satellites.
FIX 1 or 0 GPS is fixed (1); GPS is not fixed (0).
DIST String Traveled distance in meter.
PWR_VOLT String Voltage value of the main power.
I/O 6 char Current I/O status of inputs and outputs

Ignition + Input1 + Input 2 + Input 3 + Out1 + Out2.


Ignition: 1 (ON), 0 (OFF).
Input1 ~ Input3: 1 (Ground, Shorted), 0 (Opened).
Out1 ~ Out2: 1 (Active), 0 (Inactive).

In case of ST300V

Ignition + Input1 + Input 2 + Input 3 + Input4 + Out1 + Out2 + Out3.


Ignition: 1 (ON), 0 (OFF).
Input1 ~ Input4: 1 (Ground, Shorted), 0 (Opened).
Out1 ~ Out3: 1 (Active), 0 (Inactive).
EVT_ID 1 char Event type:

1 = Input1 goes to ground state.


2 = Input1 goes to open state.
3 = Input2 goes to ground state.
4 = Input2 goes to open state.
5 = Input3 goes to ground state.
6 = Input3 goes to open state.
SPD_2 String Speed in km/average speed in time report.
H_METER String Driving hour-meter.
BCK_VOLT String Voltage value of backup battery.
MSG_TYPE 1 char Report is real time (1); Report is storage (0).
ADC String Voltage value of ADC (0~30V)
ADC1 String Voltage value of ADC1 (0~5V)
ADC2 String Voltage value of ADC2 (0~5V)
RPM String Current RPM
TO String Odometer in Km/h
TF String Total fuel used by Lts
VS String Vehicle Speed by Km/h
DID 14 char. Driver ID (inserted I-button ID )
DID_REG 1 char. State of DIDs registration

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 79 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

0 = not registered. 1 = registered.


TPS_IN Total number of people on the bus. Initialized when ignition is OFF.
If TPS_S1_IN, TPS_S1_OUT, TPS_S2_IN, TPS_S2_OUT fields are
occurred, these fields are initialized only command.
TPS_OUT Total number of people out of the bus. Initialized when ignition is OFF.
If TPS_S1_IN, TPS_S1_OUT, TPS_S2_IN, TPS_S2_OUT fields are
occurred, these fields are initialized only command.
FUEL1 4 char Level of Fuel Sensor 1.
Unit: Millimeter
If fuel sensor type is Omnicomm, it is raw values.
FUEL2 4 char Level of Fuel Sensor 2 (Millimeter)
Unit: Millimeter
If fuel sensor type is Omnicomm, it is raw values.
TLS_IN Total number of people on the bus. Initialized when ignition is OFF.
TLS_OUT Total number of people out of the bus. Initialized when ignition is OFF.
TPS_S1_IN The number of people riding on the bus to counting by sensor 1.
Initialized only command.
TPS_S1_OUT The number of people get off the bus to counting by sensor 1.
Initialized only command.
TPS_S2_IN The number of people riding on the bus to counting by sensor 2.
Initialized only command.
TPS_S2_OUT Number of people get out the bus to counting by sensor 2.
Initialized only command.
<Example>

ST300
ST300EVT;100850001;01;010;20081017;07:41:56;00100;+37.478519;+126.886819;000.012;000.00;9;1;0;15.3
0;001100;1;0;4.5;1

ST300V
ST300EVT;100850001;10;010;20081017;07:41:56;00100;+37.478519;+126.886819;000.012;000.00;9;1;0;15.3
0;00110000;1;0;4.5;1;12.35;0;0

ST300A
ST300EVT;205989898;07;630;20150902;04:59:38;01454;+37.479311;+126.887833;000.004;000.00;12;1;1;12.
25;010000;6;000147;0.0;1;0.00;4.22;4.25;012497F1160000;1;000.039

ST300H
ST300EVT;205787852;04;639;20150903;05:21:07;01454;+37.479326;+126.887830;000.000;000.00;12;1;1;12.
46;010100;5;000266;0.0;1;0;012497F1160000;1;000.060

ST300C
ST300EVT;100850000;11;010;20081017;07:41:56;2F100;+37.478519;+126.886819;032.012;000.00;9;1;500;15
.30;001100;1;2000;4.5;1;1750;3.10;302799;0.00;215.86

ST300K
ST300EVT;100850000;12;010;20081017;07:41:56;2F100;+37.478519;+126.886819;032.012;000.00;9;1;500;15
.30;001100;1;2000;4.5;1;1750;3.10;302799;0.00;215.86;012497F1160000;1

ST300P
ST300EVT;205123456;13;430;20141222;02:10:23;01454;+37.479530;+126.887844;000.000;000.00;4;1;8;12.1
8;11110000;1;000050;0.0;1;10;3

ST300P(Supported extra TPS fields)

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 80 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

ST300EVT;205123456;13;430;20141222;02:10:23;01454;+37.479530;+126.887844;000.000;000.00;4;1;8;12.1
8;11110000;1;000050;0.0;1;10;3;5;2;5;1

ST300F
ST300EVT;600850805;14;453;20141222;04:22:23;01454;+37.479497;+126.887838;000.041;000.00;6;1;8;13.3
8;001100;1;000320;0.0;1;0.00;0238;0336

ST300D
ST300EVT;205858552;16;637;20150902;11:12:53;01454;+37.479318;+126.887840;000.004;000.00;11;1;0;12.
00;010100;5;000016;0.0;1;0.00;0155751F170000;1;000.024

ST340R
ST300EVT;600850779;17;351;20150804;04:41:24;01454;+37.479321;+126.887835;000.002;000.00;12;1;3232
0;12.04;001000;3;000123;4.2;1

<Note>
Some fields at the end of the report would be different. It depends on device model of the ST300 Series. For
example,
The RPM is included in EVT in ST300H.
The DID/DID_REG is included in EVT only in ST300H, 300A, ST300K and ST300D.
TO, TF and VS are included in EVT only in ST300C or ST300K.
FUEL1 and FUEL2 are included in EVT only in ST300F.
The SPD_2 is included in EVT in ST300A, ST300D and ST300H.
The TPS_S1_IN, TPS_S1_OUT, TPS_S2_IN, TPS_S2_OUT are included in EVT only on
ST300P, which one is supported extra TPS fields.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 81 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

6-3-2. Zip

Field Marks Meaning


STX 0x02 Start of zip data.
PKT_LEN 2 bytes Length of zip data, excluding STX, PKT_LEN and ETX.
HDR 0x12 Header of Event Report.
DEV_ID 5 bytes Device ID:
BCD format.
If the Device ID is 123456789, this field will be filled with 0x12, 0x34,
0x56 0x78 and 0x90.
MODEL 1 byte Device Model (According to table model).
SW_VER 2 bytes Software Version.
DATE_TIME 6 bytes GPS date & Time (Year + Month + Day + Hour + Minute + Second).
CELL 3 bytes Location Code ID (2 Bytes) + Serving Cell BSIC (1 Byte).
LAT 4 bytes 1 byte (integer) + 3 bytes (BCD).
LON 4 bytes 1 byte (integer) + 3bytes (BCD).
SPD 3 bytes 2 bytes (integer) + 1 byte (BCD).
CRS 3 bytes 2 bytes (integer) + 1 byte (BCD).
SATT_FIX 1 byte
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 ~ Bit 0
Fix Latitude Longitude Satellites count
+/- sign +/- sign
+ sign = 0, - sign = 1.
DIST 4 bytes Traveled distance in meter.
PWR_VOLT 2 bytes Voltage value of the main power:

1 byte (integer) + 1 byte (decimal, BCD)


I/O 1 byte
Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Out 2 Out1 Input 3 Input 2 Input1 Ignition
Ignition: 1 (ON), 0 (OFF).
Input1 ~ Input3: 1 (Ground, Shorted), 0 (Opened).
Out1 ~ Out2: 1 (Active), 0 (Inactive).

In case of ST300V
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Out 3 Out2 Out1 In 4 In 3 In 2 In 1 Ignition
Ignition: 1 (ON), 0 (OFF).
Input1 ~ Input4: 1 (Ground, Shorted), 0 (Opened).
Out1 ~ Out3: 1 (Active), 0 (Inactive).
EVT_ID 1 byte Event type:

1 = Input1 goes to ground state.


2 = Input2 goes to open state.
3 = Input2 goes to ground state.
4 = Input2 goes to open state.
5 = Input3 goes to ground state.
6 = Input3 goes to open state.
SPD_2 3 bytes 2 bytes (integer) + 1 byte (BCD)
H_METER 4 bytes Driving hour-meter.
BCK_VOLT 2 bytes Voltage value of backup battery:

1 byte (integer) + 1 byte (decimal, BCD)


Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document
Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 82 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

MSG_TYPE 1 byte Report is real time (1); Report is storage (0).


ADC 2 bytes Voltage value of ADC1. (0~30V)

1 byte (integer) + 1 byte (decimal, BCD)


ADC1 2 bytes Voltage value of ADC1. (0~5V)

1 byte (integer) + 1 byte (decimal, BCD)


ADC2 2 bytes Voltage value of ADC2. (0~5V)

1 byte (integer) + 1 byte (decimal, BCD)


RPM 2 bytes Current RPM
TO String Odometer in Km/h
TF String Total fuel used by Lts
VS String Vehicle Speed by Km/h
DID 7 bytes Driver ID (inserted I-button ID )
DID_REG 1 byte State of DIDs Registration

0 = not registered. 1 = registered.


TPS_IN 2 bytes Total number of people on the bus. Initialized when ignition is OFF.
If TPS_S1_IN, TPS_S1_OUT, TPS_S2_IN, TPS_S2_OUT fields are
occurred, these fields are initialized only command.
TPS_OUT 2 bytes Total number of people out of the bus. Initialized when ignition is OFF.
If TPS_S1_IN, TPS_S1_OUT, TPS_S2_IN, TPS_S2_OUT fields are
occurred, these fields are initialized only command.
FUEL1 2 bytes Level of Fuel Sensor 1

2 bytes (integer), MSB


FUEL2 2 bytes Level of Fuel Sensor 2

2 bytes (integer), MSB


TLS_IN 2 bytes Total number of people on the bus. Initialized when ignition is OFF.
TLS_OUT 2 bytes Total number of people out of the bus. Initialized when ignition is OFF.
TPS_S1_IN 2 bytes The number of people riding on the bus to counting by sensor 1.
Initialized only command.
TPS_S1_OUT 2 bytes The number of people get off the bus to counting by sensor 1.
Initialized only command.
TPS_S2_IN 2 bytes The number of people riding on the bus to counting by sensor 2.
Initialized only command.
TPS_S2_OUT 2 bytes Number of people get out the bus to counting by sensor 2.
Initialized only command.
ETX 0x03 End of zip data.
<Example>

Original String :
ST300EVT;100850000;01;010;20081017;07:41:56;2F100;+37.478519;+126.886819;032.512;000.00;9;1;500;15
.30;001100;1;2000;4.5;1;1750;012497F1160000;1

Zip Packet

Filed name Zip data Comment with string data


STX 0x02
PKT_LEN 0x00 0x42
HDR 0x12 ST300EVT
DEV_ID 0x10 0x08 0x50 0x00 0x10 100850001, BCD, MSB

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 83 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

MODEL 0x01 01
SW_VER 0x00 0x0a 010
DATE_TIME 0x08 0x0a 0x11 0x07 0x29 0x38 20081017;07:41:56
CELL 0x02 0xF1 0x00 2F100, BCD, MSB
LAT 0x25 0x47 0x85 0x19 +37.478519, Decimal part is BCD
LON 0x7e 0x88 0x68 0x19 +126.886819, Decimal part is BCD
SPD 0x00 0x20 0x51 032.512. Convert to 032.51
Decimal part is BCD, MSB
CRS 0x00 0x00 0x00 000.00, Decimal part is BCD, MSB
SATT_FIX 0x89 GPS fixed. Cell count = 9.
Lat. & Lon. sign = plus
DIST 0x00 0x00 0x01 0xF4 500. MSB
PWR_VOLT 0x0F 0x30 15.30. Decimal part is BCD, MSB
I/O 0x0c 001100
EVT_ID 0x01 1
H_METER 0x00 0x00 0x07 0xD0 2000, MSB
BCK_VOLT 0x04 0x50 4.5, Decimal part is BCD
MSG_TYPE 0x01 1
RPM 0x06, 0xD6 1750, MSB
DID 0x01 0x24 0x97 0xF1 0x16 0x00 0x00 012497F1160000
DID_REG 0x01 1
ETX 0x03

<Note>
Some fields at the end of the report would be different. It depends on device model of the ST300 Series. For
example,
The RPM is included in EVT in ST300H.
The DID/DID_REG is included in EVT only in ST300H, 300A, ST300K and ST300D.
TO, TF and VS are included in EVT only in ST300C or ST300K.
FUEL1 and FUEL2 are included in EVT only in ST300F.
The SPD_2 is included in EVT in ST300A, ST300D and ST300H.
The TPS_S1_IN, TPS_S1_OUT, TPS_S2_IN, TPS_S2_OUT are included in EVT only on
ST300P, which one is supported extra TPS fields.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 84 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

6-4. Alert Report

Device sends Alert to the server as defined by user in the course of setting the relevant parameters. Most of cases
that requiring an alert to be issued means that the vehicle or asset or its driver is in danger or is almost in danger
that should be notified by the device to the server and/or the cellular phone (If communication via SMS has been
configured) for warning.

Have a close look at the fields from the following table for more information on when and what alerts are triggered.
An <Example> of alerting and <Note> are also described in the bottom part of the table below.

ST300 ST300A ST300H ST300R ST300C ST300K


ST340/LC
HDR HDR HDR HDR HDR HDR
DEV_ID DEV_ID DEV_ID DEV_ID DEV_ID DEV_ID
MODEL MODEL MODEL MODEL MODEL MODEL
SW_VER SW_VER SW_VER SW_VER SW_VER SW_VER
DATE DATE DATE DATE DATE DATE
TIME TIME TIME TIME TIME TIME
CELL CELL CELL CELL CELL CELL
LAT LAT LAT LAT LAT LAT
LON LON LON LON LON LON
SPD SPD SPD SPD SPD SPD
CRS CRS CRS CRS CRS CRS
SATT SATT SATT SATT SATT SATT
FIX FIX FIX FIX FIX FIX
DIST DIST DIST DIST DIST DIST
PWR_VOLT PWR_VOLT PWR_VOLT PWR_VOLT PWR_VOLT PWR_VOLT
I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O
ALERT_ID ALERT_ID ALERT_ID ALERT_ID ALERT_ID ALERT_ID
H_METER H_METER H_METER H_METER H_METER H_METER
BCK_VOLT BCK_VOLT BCK_VOLT BCK_VOLT BCK_VOLT BCK_VOLT
MSG_TYPE MSG_TYPE MSG_TYPE MSG_TYPE MSG_TYPE MSG_TYPE
ADC RPM ADC ADC ADC
ADC1 DID TO TO
ADC2 DID_REG TF TF
DID SPD_2 VS VS
DID_REG AC DTC DTC
TEMPERATURE HB ENGINE_SVE DID
TEMPERATURE SHARP DID_REG
TEMPERATURE FORCE TEMPERATURE
SPD_2 TEMPERATURE
AC TEMPERATURE
HB
SHARP
FORCE

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 85 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

ST300P ST300F ST300V ST300D ST340R


HDR HDR HDR HDR HDR
DEV_ID DEV_ID DEV_ID DEV_ID DEV_ID
MODEL MODEL MODEL MODEL MODEL
SW_VER SW_VER SW_VER SW_VER SW_VER
DATE DATE DATE DATE DATE
TIME TIME TIME TIME TIME
CELL CELL CELL CELL CELL
LAT LAT LAT LAT LAT
LON LON LON LON LON
SPD SPD SPD SPD SPD
CRS CRS CRS CRS CRS
SATT SATT SATT SATT SATT
FIX FIX FIX FIX FIX
DIST DIST DIST DIST DIST
PWR_VOLT PWR_VOLT PWR_VOLT PWR_VOLT PWR_VOLT
I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O
ALERT_ID ALERT_ID ALERT_ID ALERT_ID ALERT_ID
H_METER H_METER H_METER H_METER H_METER
BCK_VOLT BCK_VOLT BCK_VOLT BCK_VOLT BCK_VOLT
MSG_TYPE MSG_TYPE MSG_TYPE MSG_TYPE MSG_TYPE
TPS_IN ADC ADC ADC
TPS_OUT FUEL1 TLS_IN DID
TPS_S1_IN FUEL2 TLS_OUT DID_REG
TPS_S1_OUT SPD_2
TPS_S2_IN AC
TPS_S2_OUT HB
SHARP
FORCE

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 86 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

6-4-1. Normal

Field Marks Meaning


HDR ST300ALT Alert report header.
DEV_ID 9 char Device ID.
MODEL 2 char Device Model (According to table model).
SW_VER 3 char Software Version.
DATE 8 char GPS date (yyyymmdd).
TIME 8 char GPS time (hh:mm:ss).
CELL String Location Code ID(3 digits hex) + Serving Cell BSIC(2 digits decimal).
LAT String Latitude (+/-xx.xxxxxx).
LON String Longitude (+/-xxx.xxxxxx).
SPD String Speed in km/h.
CRS String Course over ground in degree.
SATT String Number of satellites.
FIX 1 or 0 GPS is fixed (1); GPS is not fixed (0).
DIST String Traveled distance in meter.
PWR_VOLT String Voltage value of main power.
I/O 6 char Current I/O status of inputs and outputs

Ignition + Input1 + Input 2 + Input 3 + Out1 + Out2.


Ignition: 1 (ON), 0 (OFF).
Input1 ~ Input3: 1 (Ground, Shorted), 0 (Opened).
Out1 ~ Out2: 1 (Active), 0 (Inactive).

In case of ST300V

Ignition + Input1 + Input 2 + Input 3 + Input4 + Out1 + Out2 + Out3.


Ignition: 1 (ON), 0 (OFF).
Input1 ~ Input4: 1 (Ground, Shorted), 0 (Opened).
Out1 ~ Out3: 1 (Active), 0 (Inactive).
ALERT_ID 1 char. Alert type

1 = Start driving faster than SPEED_LIMIT.


2 = Ended over-speed condition.
3 = Disconnected GPS antenna.
4 = Reconnected GPS antenna after disconnected.
5 = The vehicle exited the geo-fenced area that has the following ID.
6 = The vehicle entered the geo-fenced area that has the following ID.
8 = Shorted GPS antenna.
This alert may not support depending on GPS chipset model.

9 = Enter the Deep Sleep Mode.


10 = Exit from the Deep Sleep Mode.
13 = Backup battery error.

14 = Vehicle battery goes down to a very low level.


Refer to9-6.Protection of Vehicle Battery.

15 = Shocked.
16 = Collision has occurred to the vehicle.
18 = Deviated from the predefined route.
19 = Entered into the predefined route.
Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document
Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 87 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

22 = Engine :Exceed Speed


23 = Engine :Vehicle Speed Violation
24 = Engine :Coolant Temperature Violation
25 = Engine :Oil Pressure Violation
26 = Engine :RPM Violation
27 = Engine :Sudden Hard Brake Violation
28 = Engine :Error Code(DTC)
33 = Ignition ON
34 = Ignition OFF
40 = Connected to the Main Power source.
41 = Disconnected from the Main Power source.
44 = Connected to the Back-up Battery.
45 = Disconnected from the Back-up Battery.
46 = Alert of fast acceleration from Driver Pattern Analysis.
47 = Alert of fast acceleration from Driver Pattern Analysis.
48 = Alert of sharp turn from Driver Pattern Analysis.
49 = Alert of over speed from Driver Pattern Analysis.
50 = Jamming detected.
59 = Inserted I-Button.
60 = Removed I-Button.
61 = The vehicle turns on but doesnt drive during predefined time.
62 = Stopped more than predefined time.
63 = Dead center.
64 = Over RPM.
65 = Completed automatic RPM calibration.

66 = Completed automatic odometer calibration.


(by ignition or by command).

67 = Completed automatic odometer calibration as another type in dual


gear system.

68 = Alert of Stop limit at Ignition ON.


69 = Alert of Moving after Alert 68.
73 = Alert of rapid reduction of the Fuel.

75 = when the temperature is higher than the preset temperature

76 = when the temperature is lower than the preset temperature

77 = when temperature of the refrigerator gets back to the normal range


after alerting 75 or 76
75:SENSOR ID / 76:SENSOR ID / 77:SENSOR ID

78 = when engine service maintenance value is under 1000 and can


division 100.
80 = Aler if rapid increased of the Fuel
SPD_2 String Speed in km/average speed in time report.
AC [X/256]G Acceleration in X axel of accelerometer. (Range : -512 ~ 511)
HB [X/256]G Harsh brake in X axel of accelerometer. (Range : -512 ~ 511)
SHARP [X/256]G Sharp turn in X axel of accelerometer. (Range : -512 ~ 511)
FORCE [X/256]G Value of force when DPA Alert.
H_METER String Driving hour-meter.
BCK_VOLT String Voltage value of backup battery.
MSG_TYPE 1 char Report is made in real time (1); Report is in storage (0).
Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document
Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 88 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

ADC String Voltage value of ADC (0~30V)


ADC1 String Voltage value of ADC1 (0~5V)
ADC2 String Voltage value of ADC2 (0~5V)
RPM String Current RPM
TO String Odometer in Km/h
TF String Total fuel used by Lts
VS String Vehicle Speed by Km/h
DTC String DTC code (It should be used just in case of alert 28. Otherwise, please
omit this field).

SPN1+ SPN2+SPN3&FMI+CM&OC

It is a hex code, not decimal.


DID 14 char. Driver ID (inserted I-button ID )
DID_REG 1 char. State of DIDs registration

0 = not registered. 1 = registered.


TPS_IN Total number of people on the bus. Initialized when ignition is OFF.
If TPS_S1_IN, TPS_S1_OUT, TPS_S2_IN, TPS_S2_OUT fields are
occurred, these fields are initialized only command.
TPS_OUT Total number of people out of the bus. Initialized when ignition is OFF.
If TPS_S1_IN, TPS_S1_OUT, TPS_S2_IN, TPS_S2_OUT fields are
occurred, these fields are initialized only command.
FUEL1 4 char Level of Fuel Sensor 1.
Unit: Millimeter
If fuel sensor type is Omnicomm, it is raw values.
FUEL2 4 char Level of Fuel Sensor 2 (Millimeter)
Unit: Millimeter
If fuel sensor type is Omnicomm, it is raw values.
TEMPERATURE string The Sensor ID & Temperature
TEMPERATURE string The Sensor ID & Temperature
TEMPERATURE string The Sensor ID & Temperature
ENGINE_SVE String Engine service maintenance value

This filed appears only Alert number 78.


TLS_IN Total number of people on the bus. Initialized when ignition is OFF.
TLS_OUT Total number of people out of the bus. Initialized when ignition is OFF.
TPS_S1_IN The number of people riding on the bus to counting by sensor 1.
Initialized only command.
TPS_S1_OUT The number of people get off the bus to counting by sensor 1.
Initialized only command.
TPS_S2_IN The number of people riding on the bus to counting by sensor 2.
Initialized only command.
TPS_S2_OUT Number of people get out the bus to counting by sensor 2.
Initialized only command.
<Example>

ST300
ST300ALT;100850000;01;010;20081017;07:41:56;00100;+37.478519;+126.886819;000.012;000.00;9;1;0;15.3
0;001100;3;0;4.5;1

ST300V
ST300ALT;100850000;10;010;20081017;07:41:56;00100;+37.478519;+126.886819;000.012;000.00;9;1;0;15.3
0;00110000;3;0;4.5;1;12.35;0;0
Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document
Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 89 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

ST300A
Temperature no use
ST300ALT;205989898;07;630;20150902;04:33:28;01454;+37.479299;+126.887830;000.009;000.00;12;1;1;12.
25;010100;34;000147;0.0;1;0.00;4.23;4.27;012497F1160000;1;000.035
Temperature use
ST300ALT;205989898;07;630;20150902;04:33:28;01454;+37.479299;+126.887830;000.009;000.00;12;1;1;12.
25;010100;34;000147;0.0;1;0.00;4.23;4.27;012497F1160000;1;28E4D95F060000D5:+24.1;28F5573B050000A
A:+24.3;28BBE721050000A0:+24.8;000.035

ST300H
ST300ALT;205787852;04;639;20150903;05:22:12;01454;+37.479331;+126.887825;000.000;000.00;12;1;1;12.
46;110100;33;000266;0.0;1;0;012497F1160000;1;000.054

ST300C
ST300ALT;100850001;11;010;20081017;07:41:56;2F100;+37.478519;+126.886819;032.512;000.00;9;1;500;15
.30;001100;1;501;2000;4.5;1;1750;3.10;302799;0.00;215.86;0

If ALERT_ID is 28:
ST300ALT;100850001;11;010;20081017;07:41:56;2F100;+37.478519;+126.886819;032.512;000.00;9;1;500;15
.30;001100;28;501;2000;4.5;1;1750;3.10;302799;0.00;215.86;01020304;012497F1160000;1

ST300K
Temperature no use
ST300ALT;100850001;12;010;20081017;07:41:56;2F100;+37.478519;+126.886819;032.512;000.00;9;1;500;15
.30;001100;1;501;2000;4.5;1;1750;3.10;302799;0.00;215.86;012497F1160000;1

Temperature use
ST300ALT;100850001;12;010;20081017;07:41:56;2F100;+37.478519;+126.886819;032.512;000.00;9;1;500;15
.30;001100;75:28E4D95F060000D5;501;2000;4.5;1;1750;3.10;302799;0.00;215.86;012497F1160000;1;28E4D
95F060000D5:+24.1;28F5573B050000AA:+24.3;28BBE721050000A0:+24.8

ST300KDTC
ST300ALT;100850001;12;010;20081017;07:41:56;2F100;+37.478519;+126.886819;032.512;000.00;9;1;500;15
.30;001100;28;501;2000;4.5;1;1750;3.10;302799;0.00;215.86;01020304;012497F1160000;1

ST300P
ST300ALT;205123456;13;430;20141222;02:09:57;01454;+37.479530;+126.887844;000.000;000.00;4;1;8;12.1
4;10110000;45;000050;0.0;1;10;3

ST300P(Supported extra TPS fields)


ST300ALT;205123456;13;430;20141222;02:09:57;01454;+37.479530;+126.887844;000.000;000.00;4;1;8;12.1
4;10110000;45;000050;0.0;1;10;3;5;2;5;1

ST300F
ST300ALT;600850805;14;453;20141222;04:37:48;01454;+37.479722;+126.888591;000.046;000.00;7;1;47;13.
37;000000;73;000320;0.0;1;0.00;0238;0336

ST300D

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 90 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

ST300ALT;205858552;16;637;20150902;11:15:34;01454;+37.479320;+126.887834;000.002;000.00;11;1;0;12.
00;110100;33;000016;0.0;1;0.00;0155751F170000;1;000.036

ST340R
ST300ALT;205124563;17;605;20150717;02:25:41;01454;+37.479321;+126.887838;000.002;000.00;11;1;1;13.
82;110000;59;000044;0.0;1

Examples for geo-fence

Into circular geo-fence group 2


ET200INALT;000000;105;20110419;05:38:03;00054;+37.504995;+126.877360;029.863;136.13;8;1;79;11.63;10
0000;6002

Out from circular geo-fence group 1


ET200INALT;000000;105;20110419;05:38:03;00054;+37.504995;+126.877360;029.863;136.13;8;1;79;11.63;10
0000;5001

Examples for polygon geo-fence


Report relating to Polygonal geo-fence is same as normal alert except for adding Polygonal geo-fence group id.
Here is sample as below.

In to polygonal geo-fence group 2


ET200INALT;000000;105;20110419;05:38:03;00054;+37.504995;+126.877360;029.863;136.13;8;1;79;11.63;10
0000;6P02

Out from polygonal geo-fence group 1


ET200INALT;000000;105;20110419;05:38:03;00054;+37.504995;+126.877360;029.863;136.13;8;1;79;11.63;10
0000;5P01

Exceed the predefined over-speed of the polygonal geo-fence group 2


ET200INALT;000000;105;20110419;05:38:03;00054;+37.504995;+126.877360;029.863;136.13;8;1;79;11.63;10
0000;1P02

Speed down from the over-speed state of the polygonal geo-fence group 1
ET200INALT;000000;105;20110419;05:38:03;00054;+37.504995;+126.877360;029.863;136.13;8;1;79;11.63;10
0000;2P01
[2015-11-11 11:51:04]
ST300ALT;205788787;07;682;20151111;02:51:08;01454;+37.479316;+126.887849;000.002;000.00;9;1;3;12.3
6;100001;46;000336;0.0;1;0.00;4.26;4.24;00000000000000;0;000.029;12;-51;-247;0.50

DPA Alert

ST300A
Temperature no use
ST300ALT;205989898;07;630;20150902;04:33:28;01454;+37.479299;+126.887830;000.009;000.00;12;1;1;12.
25;010100;34;000147;0.0;1;0.00;4.23;4.27;012497F1160000;1;000.029;12;-51;-247;0.50
Temperature use
ST300ALT;205989898;07;630;20150902;04:33:28;01454;+37.479299;+126.887830;000.009;000.00;12;1;1;12.
25;010100;34;000147;0.0;1;0.00;4.23;4.27;012497F1160000;1;28E4D95F060000D5:+24.1;28F5573B050000A
A:+24.3;28BBE721050000A0:+24.8;000.029;12;-51;-247;0.50

ST300D

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 91 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

ST300ALT;205858552;16;637;20150902;11:15:34;01454;+37.479320;+126.887834;000.002;000.00;11;1;0;12.
00;110100;33;000016;0.0;1;0.00;0155751F170000;1;000.029;12;-51;-247;0.50

ST300H
ST300ALT;205787852;04;639;20150903;05:22:12;01454;+37.479331;+126.887825;000.000;000.00;12;1;1;12.
46;110100;33;000266;0.0;1;0;012497F1160000;1;000.029;12;-51;-247;0.50

<Note>
ALERT_ID 3, 4, and 8 are applicable to the device that has an external GPS antenna.

ALERT_ID 13 may be reported if the Back-up Battery cannot be charged or cannot be supported for long time
enough in case the Main Power Source (vehicles battery) is disconnected.

ALERT_ID 46,47, 48 and 49 are optional functions to analyze the Driver Pattern.

ALERT_ID 59 and 60 are applicable to the device that has I-Button event line.

From ALERT_ID 61 to 67 are applicable only to ST300H.

From ALERT_ID 22 to 28 are applicable only to ST300C or ST300K

ALERT_ID 28 : It attaches a field for error code in front of the field of alert as below. Otherwise, its omitted.
DTC CODE : 0x01020304 ( SPN1(0x01)+ SPN2(0x02)+SPN3&FMI(0x03)+CM&OC(0x04)

ALERT_ID 73 is applicable only to ST300F.

ALERT_ID 75/76 is applicable only to ST300A and ST300K.

ALERT_ID 78 is applicable only to ST300C.

Some fields at the end of the report would be different. It depends on device model of ST300 Series. For
example,
The RPM is included in ALT in ST300H.

The DID/DID_REG is included in ALT only in ST300H, 300A, ST300K and ST300D.

TO, TF and VS are included in ALT only in ST300C or ST300K.

FUEL1 and FUEL2 are included in ALT only in ST300F

The TEPERATURE is included in ALT only in ST300A and ST300K.

If the temperature sensor is not connected to the device, the field of TEMPERATUE is marked with
a colon, :.

ENGINE_SVE is included in ALT only in ST300C and Alert number 78.

The SPD_2 is included in ALT only in ST300A, ST300D and ST300H.

The AC, HB, SHARP and FORCE are include in Alert number 46, 47, 48 and 49 only in
ST300A, ST300D and ST300H.

The TPS_S1_IN, TPS_S1_OUT, TPS_S2_IN, TPS_S2_OUT are included in ALT only on


ST300P, which one is supported extra TPS fields.
Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document
Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 92 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 93 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

6-4-2. Zip

Field Marks Meaning


STX 0x02 Start of zip data.
PKT_LEN 2 bytes Length of zip data, excluding STX, PKT_LEN and ETX.
HDR 0x13 Header of Alert Report.
DEV_ID 5 bytes Device ID:
BCD format.

If the Device ID is 123456789, this field will be filled with 0x12, 0x34, 0x56
0x78 and 0x90.
MODEL 1byte Device Model (According to table model).
SW_VER 2 bytes Software Version.
DATE_TIME 6 bytes GPS date & Time (Year + Month + Day + Hour + Minute + Second).
CELL 3 bytes Location Code ID (2 Bytes) + Serving Cell BSIC (1 Byte).
LAT 4 bytes 1 byte (integer) + 3 bytes (BCD).
LON 4 bytes 1 byte (integer) + 3bytes (BCD).
SPD 3 bytes 2 bytes (integer) + 1 byte (BCD).
CRS 3 bytes 2 bytes (integer) + 1 byte (BCD).
SATT_FIX 1 byte
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 ~ Bit 0
Fix Latitude Longitude Satellites count
+/- sign +/- sign
+ sign = 0, - sign = 1.

DIST 4 bytes Traveled distance in meter.


PWR_VOLT 2bytes Voltage value of main power:
1 byte (integer) + 1 byte (decimal, BCD)
I/O 1 byte
Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Out 2 Out1 Input 3 Input 2 Input1 Ignition
Ignition : 1 (ON), 0 (OFF)
Input1 ~ Input3 : 1 (Ground, Shorted), 0 (Opened)
Out1 ~ Out2 : 1 (Active), 0 (Inactive)

In case of ST300V
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Out 3 Out2 Out1 In 4 In 3 In 2 In 1 Ignition
Ignition: 1 (ON), 0 (OFF).
Input1 ~ Input4: 1 (Ground, Shorted), 0 (Opened).
Out1 ~ Out3: 1 (Active), 0 (Inactive).
ALERT_ID 1 byte Alert type:

0x01 ~ 0x4E
SPD_2 3 bytes 2 bytes (integer) + 1 byte (BCD)
AC 2 bytes Acceleration in X axel of accelerometer.
HB 2 bytes Harsh brake in X axel of accelerometer.
SHARP 2 bytes Sharp turn in X axel of accelerometer.
FORCE 4 bytes Value of force when DPA Alert
1 byte (integer) + 3 bytes (BCD)
H_METER 4 bytes Driving hour-meter.
BCK_VOLT 2 bytes Voltage value of backup battery:

1 byte (integer) + 1 byte (decimal, BCD)


Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document
Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 94 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

MSG_TYPE 1 byte Report is made in real time (1); Report is in storage (0).
ADC 2 bytes Voltage value of ADC1. (0~30V)

1 byte (integer) + 1 byte (decimal, BCD)


ADC1 2 bytes Voltage value of ADC1. (0~5V)

1 byte (integer) + 1 byte (decimal, BCD)


ADC2 2 bytes Voltage value of ADC2. (0~5V)

1 byte (integer) + 1 byte (decimal, BCD)


RPM 2 bytes Current RPM
TO 4 bytes Odometer by Km/h (4 bytes(integer))
TF 5 bytes Total fuel used by Lts (4 bytes(integer) + 1byte(BCD))
VS 3bytes Vehicle Speed by Km/h (2 bytes(integer)+1byte(BCD))
DTC 4 bytes Malfunction error code (Just in case of alert 28. Otherwise omit this
field.)

Upper byte : Active error code

Bottom byte : Previous active error code (Please refer to Note, hex.).
DID 7 byte Driver ID (inserted I-button ID )
DID_REG 1 byte State of DIDs registration

0 = not registered. 1 = registered.


TPS_IN 2 bytes Total number of people on the bus. Initialized when ignition is OFF.
If TPS_S1_IN, TPS_S1_OUT, TPS_S2_IN, TPS_S2_OUT fields
are occurred, these fields are initialized only command.
TPS_OUT 2 bytes Total number of people out of the bus. Initialized when ignition is OFF.
If TPS_S1_IN, TPS_S1_OUT, TPS_S2_IN, TPS_S2_OUT fields
are occurred, these fields are initialized only command.
FUEL1 2 bytes Level of Fuel Sensor 1

2 bytes (integer), MSB


FUEL2 2 bytes Level of Fuel Sensor 2

2 bytes (integer), MSB


TEMPERATURE 10 bytes The Sensor ID(8bytes) & Temperature(2bytes) (*Please refer to
Appendices 10.1)
TEMPERATURE 10 bytes The Sensor ID(8bytes) & Temperature(2bytes) (*Please refer to
Appendices 10.1)
TEMPERATURE 10 bytes The Sensor ID(8bytes) & Temperature(2bytes) (*Please refer to
Appendices 10.1)
ENGINE_SVE_SIGN 1 byte + sign = 0, - sign = 1.
ENGINE_SVE 2 bytes Engine service maintenance value

This filed appears only with Alert number 78.


TLS_IN 2 bytes Total number of people on the bus. Initialized when ignition is OFF.
TLS_OUT 2 bytes Total number of people out of the bus. Initialized when ignition is OFF.
TPS_S1_IN 2 bytes The number of people riding on the bus to counting by sensor 1.
Initialized only command.
TPS_S1_OUT 2 bytes The number of people get off the bus to counting by sensor 1.
Initialized only command.
TPS_S2_IN 2 bytes The number of people riding on the bus to counting by sensor 2.
Initialized only command.
Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document
Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 95 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

TPS_S2_OUT 2 bytes Number of people get out the bus to counting by sensor 2.
Initialized only command.
ETX 0x03 End of zip data.
<Example>

Original String :
ST300ALT;100850001;01;010;20081017;07:41:56;2F100;+37.478519;+126.886819;032.512;000.00;9;1;500;15
.30;001100;1;501;2000;4.5;1;1750;012497F1160000;1

Zip Packet

Filed name Zip data Comment with string data


STX 0x02
PKT_LEN 0x00 0x42
HDR 0x13 ST300ALT
DEV_ID 0x10 0x08 0x50 0x00 0x10 100850001, BCD, MSB
MODEL 0x01 01
SW_VER 0x00 0x0a 010
DATE_TIME 0x08 0x0a 0x11 0x07 0x29 0x38 20081017;07:41:56
CELL 0x02 0xF1 0x00 2F100, BCD, MSB
LAT 0x25 0x47 0x85 0x19 +37.478519, Decimal part is BCD
LON 0x7e 0x88 0x68 0x19 +126.886819, Decimal part is BCD
SPD 0x00 0x20 0x51 032.512. Convert to 032.51
Decimal part is BCD, MSB
CRS 0x00 0x00 0x00 000.00, Decimal part is BCD, MSB
SATT_FIX 0x89 GPS fixed. Cell count = 9.
Lat. & Lon. sign = plus
DIST 0x00 0x00 0x01 0xF4 500. MSB
PWR_VOLT 0x0F 0x30 15.30. Decimal part is BCD, MSB
I/O 0x0c 001100
EVT_ID 0x01 1
H_METER 0x00 0x00 0x07 0xD0 2000, MSB
BCK_VOLT 0x04 0x50 4.5, Decimal part is BCD
MSG_TYPE 0x01 1
RPM 0x06, 0xD6 1750, MSB
DID 0x01 0x24 0x97 0xF1 0x16 0x00 0x00 012497F1160000
DID_REG 0x01 1
ENGINE_SVE 0x00 ENGINE_SVE sign is plus.
_SIGN
ENGINE_SVE 0x00 0x00 0
ETX 0x03

<Note>
ALERT_ID 3, 4, and 8 are applicable to the device that has an external GPS antenna.

ALERT_ID 13 may be reported if the Back-up Battery cannot be charged or cannot be supported for long time
enough in case the Main Power source (vehicles battery) is disconnected.

ALERT_ID 46,47, 48 and 49 are optional functions to analyze the Driver Pattern.

ALERT_ID 59 and 60 are applicable to the device that has I-Button event line.

From ALERT_ID 61 to 67 are applicable only to ST300H.

From ALERT_ID 22 to 28 are applicable only to ST300C or ST300K

ALERT_ID 28 : It attaches a field for error code in front of the field of alert as below. Otherwise, its omitted.
Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document
Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 96 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

DTC CODE : 0x01020304 ( SPN1(0x01)+ SPN2(0x02)+SPN3&FMI(0x03)+CM&OC(0x04)

ALERT_ID 73 is applicable only to ST300F.

ALERT_ID 78 is applicable only to ST300C.

Some fields at the end of the report would be different. It depends on device model of ST300 Series. For
example,

The RPM is included in ALT in ST300H.


The DID/DID_REG is included in ALT only in ST300H, 300A, ST300K and ST300D.
TO, TF and VS are included in ALT only in ST300C or ST300K.
FUEL1 and FUEL2 are included in ALT only in ST300F.
The TEPERATURE is included in ALT only in ST300A and ST300K.
ENGINE_SVE_SIGN and ENGINE_SVE are included in ALT only in ST300C and Alert number
78.
The SPD_2 is included in ALT only in ST300A, ST300D and ST300H.
The AC, HB, SHARP and FORCE are include in Alert number 46, 47, 48 and 49 only in
ST300A, ST300D and ST300H.
The TPS_S1_IN, TPS_S1_OUT, TPS_S2_IN, TPS_S2_OUT are included in ALT only on
ST300P, which one is supported extra TPS fields.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 97 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

6-5. Travel Event Report

Device sends Travel Event to the server as defined by user in the course of setting the telemetry parameters. This
event is sent when the vehicle is parked. This report is used only on ST300A, ST300H, ST300K and ST300D.

ST300A / ST300K ST300H


/ ST300D
HDR HDR
DEV_ID DEV_ID
MODEL MODEL
SW_VER SW_VER
DATE DATE
TIME TIME
DIST DIST
PWR_VOLT PWR_VOLT
H_METER H_METER
BCK_VOLT BCK_VOLT
MSG_TYPE MSG_TYPE
TRAVEL_DIST TRAVEL_DIST
TRAVEL_TIME TRAVEL_TIME
LAT_TRAVEL_ST TIME_STOP
LON_TRAVEL_ST TIME_MOVING
LAT_TRAVEL_FI LAT_TRAVEL_ST
LON_TRAVEL_FI LON_TRAVEL_ST
AVERAGE_SPD LAT_TRAVEL_FI
MAX_SPD LON_TRAVEL_FI
TIME_OVER_SPD AVERAGE_SPD
DRIVER_ID MAX_SPD
TIME_OVER_SPD
TIME_ECO_UP
TIME_ECO_DOWN
TIME_ECO_INSIDE
TIME_OVER_RPM
TIME_DC
DRIVER_ID

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 98 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

6-5-1. Normal

Field Marks Meaning


HDR ST300HTE Status report header.
DEV_ID 9 char Device ID.
MODEL 2 char Device Model (According to table model).
SW_VER 3 char Software Release Version.
DATE 8 char GPS date (yyyymmdd):
Year + Month + Day.
TIME 8 char GPS time (hh:mm:ss):
Hour : Minute : Second.
DIST String Traveled distance in meter.
PWR_VOLT String Voltage value of main power.
H_METER String Driving hour-meter.
BCK_VOLT String Voltage value of backup battery.
MSG_TYPE 1 char Report is real time (1); Report is storage (0).
TRAVEL_DIST String Traveled distance during this travel(in meter).
TRAVEL_TIME String Time of this travel (in minute).
TIME_STOP String Duration of stop in this travel (in minute).
TIME_MOVING String Duration of moving in this travel (in minute).
LAT_TRAVEL_ST String Latitude of start position of this travel (+/-xx.xxxxxx).
LON_TRAVEL_ST String Longitude of start position of this travel (+/-xxx.xxxxxx).
LAT_TRAVEL_FI String Latitude of end position of this travel (+/-xx.xxxxxx).
LON_TRAVEL_FI String Longitude of end position of this travel(+/-xxx.xxxxxx).
AVERAGE_SPD String Average speed in this travel(in km/h).
MAX_SPD String Maximum speed in this travel (in km/h).
TIME_OVER_SPD String Accumulated time of the vehicles speed which has exceeded the over-
speed in this travel (in minute).
TIME_ECO_UP String Accumulated time of the engines RPM which has exceeded the economic
range in this travel (in minute).
TIME_ECO_DOWN String Accumulated time of the engines RPM which has been lower than the
economic range in this travel (in minute).
TIME_ECO_INSIDE String Accumulated time of the engines RPM which has been within the
economic range in this travel (in minute).
TIME_OVER_RPM String Accumulated time of the engines RPM which has exceeded the maximum
RPM in this travel (in minute).
TIME_DC String Accumulated time of the vehicle which has been driven putting the gear in
dead center in this travel (in minute).
DRIVER_ID String Inserted driver ID.
<Example>

ST300HTE;100850000;07;248;20110101;00:13:52;167559;12.28;004005;0.0;1;0;3;3;0;-22.881018;-047.070831
;-22.881018;-047.070831;000.000;000.000;0;0;3;0;0;0;01E04D44160000

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 99 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

6-5-2. Zip

Field Marks Meaning


STX 0x02 Start of zip data.
PKT_LEN 2 bytes Length of zip data, excluding STX, PKT_LEN and ETX.
HDR 0x1B Header of Travel Event Report.
DEV_ID 5 bytes Device ID:
BCD format.
If the Device ID is 123456789, this field will be filled with 0x12, 0x34, 0x56
0x78 and 0x90.
MODEL 1 byte Device Model (According to table model).
SW_VER 2 bytes Software Version.
DATE_TIME 6 bytes GPS date & Time (Year + Month + Day + Hour + Minute + Second).
DIST 4 bytes Traveled distance in meter.
PWR_VOLT 2 bytes Voltage value of main power:
1 byte (integer) + 1 byte (BCD).
H_METER 4 bytes Driving hour-meter.
BCK_VOLT 2 bytes Voltage value of backup battery.
MSG_TYPE 1 byte Report is real time (1); Report is storage (0).
TRAVEL_DIST 3 bytes Traveled distance during this travel(in meter).
TRAVEL_TIME 2 bytes Time of this travel (in minute).
TIME_STOP 2 bytes Duration of stop in this travel (in minute).
TIME_MOVING 2 bytes Duration of moving in this travel (in minute).
LAT_TRAVEL_ST 4 bytes Latitude of start position of this travel (+/-xx.xxxxxx):
1 byte (integer) + 3 bytes (BCD).
LON_TRAVEL_ST 4 bytes Longitude of start position of this travel (+/-xxx.xxxxxx):
1 byte (integer) + 3 bytes (BCD).
LAT_TRAVEL_FI 4 bytes Latitude of end position of this travel (+/-xx.xxxxxx):
1 byte (integer) + 3 bytes (BCD).
LON_TRAVEL_FI 4 bytes Longitude of end position of this travel(+/-xxx.xxxxxx):
1 byte (integer) + 3 bytes (BCD).
POS_SIGN 1 byte Minus sign of travel positions:
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Travel start Travel start Travel stop Travel stop
latitude longitude latitude longitude
+/- sign +/- sign +/- sign +/- sign
+ sign = 0, - sign = 1.
AVERAGE_SPD 3 bytes Average speed in this travel (in km/h)

2 bytes (integer) + 1 byte (BCD).


MAX_SPD 3 bytes Maximum speed in this travel (in km/h)

2 bytes (integer) + 1 byte (BCD).


TIME_OVER_SPD 2 bytes Accumulated time of the vehicles speed which has exceeded the over-
speed in this travel (in minute).
TIME_ECO_UP 2 bytes Accumulated time of the engines RPM which has exceeded the economic
range in this travel (in minute).
TIME_ECO_DOWN 2 bytes Accumulated time of the engines RPM which has been lower than the
economic range in this travel (in minute).
TIME_ECO_INSIDE 2 bytes Accumulated time of the engines RPM which has been within the
economic range in this travel (in minute).
TIME_OVER_RPM 2 bytes Accumulated time of the engines RPM which has exceeded the maximum
RPM in this travel (in minute).

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 100 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

TIME_DC 2 bytes Accumulated time of the vehicle which has been driven putting the gear in
dead center in this travel (in minute).
DRIVER_ID 7 bytes Inserted driver ID: BCD format.
ETX 0x03 End of zip data.

<Example>

Original String :
ST300HTE;600850777;07;377;20140428;00:13:52;151227;12.11;000662;0.0;1;135010;351;21;330;
-22.881018;-047.130831;-22.882034;-047.087123;035.350;096.480;3;5;12;334;7;0;01E04D44160000

Zip Packet

Filed name Zip data Comment with string data


STX 0x02
PKT_LEN 0x00 0x59
HDR 0x1B ST300HTE
DEV_ID 0x60 0x08 0x50 0x77 0x70 600850777
MODEL 0x07 07
SW_VER 0x01 0x79 377
DATE_TIME 0x0E 0x04 0x1C 0x00 0x0D 0x34 2014042800:13:52
DIST 0x00 0x02 0x4E0xBB 151227
PWR_VOLT 0x0C 0x11 12.11
H_METER 0x00 0x000x02 0x96 000662
BCK_VOLT 0x00 0x00 0.0
MSG_TYPE 0x01 1
TRAVEL_DIST 0x02 0x0F 0x62 135010
TRAVEL_TIME 0x01 0x5F 351
TIME_STOP 0x00 0x15 21
TIME_MOVING 0x01 0x4A 330
LAT_TRAVEL_ST 0x16 0x88 0x10 0x18 -22.881018
LON_TRAVEL_ST 0x2F0x13 0x08 0x31 -047.130831
LAT_TRAVEL_FI 0x16 0x88 0x20 0x34 -22.882034
LON_TRAVEL_FI 0x2F 0x08 0x71 0x23 -047.087123
POS_SIGN 0x0F
AVERAGE_SPD 0x00 0x23 0x35 035.350
MAX_SPD 0x00 0x60 0x48 096.480
TIME_OVER_SPD 0x00 0x03 3
TIME_ECO_UP 0x00 0x05 5
TIME_ECO_DOWN 0x00 0x0C 12
TIME_ECO_INSIDE 0x01 0x4E 334
TIME_OVER_RPM 0x00 0x07 7
TIME_DC 0x00 0x00 0
DRIVER_ID 0x01 0xE0 0x4D0x44 0x16 0x00 0x00 01E04D44160000
ETX 0x03

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 101 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

6-6. Keep-Alive Report

A typical GSM/GPRS service provider in any countries has its own corporate policy restricting connection time of
device with the GSM/GPRS networks only at an interval if device does not communicate with its server for a long
time, which is 1 hour, for instance. The time length varies depending upon such service provider. Please check it by
asking your GSM/GPRS service provider this question in your country.

In a case that there has not been any communication between a device and its server for such a time period, the
GSM/GPRS service provider would not provide GSM/GPRS service for the device temporarily. To avoid such a case,
device sends the server this Keep-Alive Report at an interval, T4 (Keep-Alive interval named in SyncTrak and in
this document), which is shorter than the 60 minutes. User of the device may adjust the value of T4 as desired.

This report is intended to mean that the device is still alive and ready for any possible communications with the server
for that long time (T4) even though the device does not interact temporarily with the server.

6-6-1. Normal

All Models
HDR
DEV_ID

Field Marks Meaning


HDR ST300ALV Header of Alive report.
DEV_ID 9 char Device ID.
<Example>
ST300ALV;100850000

6-6-2. Zip

Field Marks Meaning


HDR 0x14 Alive Report header (1 byte).
DEV_ID 5 bytes Device ID:
BCD format.
If the Device ID is 123456789, this field will be filled with 0x12, 0x34, 0x56,
0x78 and 0x90.
<Example>
Original String :
ST300ALV;600850777

Zip Packet

Filed name Zip data Comment with string data


STX 0x02
PKT_LEN 0x00 0x06
HDR 0x14 ST300ALV
DEV_ID 0x60 0x08 0x50 0x77 0x70 600850777
ETX 0x03

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 102 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

6-7. Data Reporting from External RS232

If device is connected with an external appliance via RS232, it receives data from the appliance and sends the data
to the server. Data transfer is made with the string below.

Dont use software flow control, if you use RS232.

HDR DEV_ID MODEL SW_VER DATE TIME CELL LAT LON

SPD CRS SATT FIX DIST PWR_VOLT I/O LEN DATA

CHK_SUM H_METER BCK_VOLT MSG_TYPE

6-7-1. Normal

Field Marks Meaning


HDR ST300UEX Report Header of External Devices Data.
DEV_ID 9 char Device ID.
MODEL 2 char Device Model (According to table model).
SW_VER 3 char Software Version.
DATE 8 char GPS date (yyyymmdd).
TIME 8 char GPS time (hh:mm:ss).
CELL String Location Code ID(3 digits hex) + Serving Cell BSIC(2 digits decimal).
LAT String Latitude (+/-xx.xxxxxx).
LON String Longitude (+/-xxx.xxxxxx).
SPD String Speed in km/h.
CRS String Course over ground in degree.
SATT String Number of satellites.
FIX 1 or 0 GPS is fixed (1); GPS is not fixed (0).
DIST String Traveled distance in meter.
PWR_VOLT String Voltage value of main power.
I/O 6 char Current I/O status of inputs and outputs

Ignition + Input1 + Input 2 + Input 3 + Out1 + Out2.


Ignition: 1 (ON), 0 (OFF).
Input1 ~ Input3: 1 (Ground, Shorted), 0 (Opened).
Out1 ~ Out2: 1 (Active), 0 (Inactive).

In case of ST300V

Ignition + Input1 + Input 2 + Input 3 + Input4 + Out1 + Out2 + Out3.


Ignition: 1 (ON), 0 (OFF).
Input1 ~ Input4: 1 (Ground, Shorted), 0 (Opened).
Out1 ~ Out2: 1 (Active), 0 (Inactive).
LEN String Length of Data.
DATA Data from external RS232 device

Up to 500 bytes.
CHK_SUM String 8bit Checksum. Lower than 8 bit of the summation of DATA field.
H_METER String Driving hour-meter.
BCK_VOLT String Voltage value of backup battery.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 103 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

MSG_TYPE 1 char Report is real time (1); Report is storage (0).


<Example>
ST300UEX;100850000;01;010;20081017;07:41:56;2F100;+37.478519;+126.886819;000.012;000.00;9;1;0;15.3
0;001100;25;Welcome to Suntech World!;12;0;4.5;1

6-7-2. Zip

Field Marks Meaning


STX 0x02 Start of zip data.
PKT_LEN 2 bytes Length of zip data, excluding STX, PKT_LEN and ETX.
HDR 0x16 Report Header of External Devices Data.
DEV_ID 5 bytes Device ID

BCD format

If the Device ID is 123456789, this field will be filled with 0x12, 0x34, 0x56
0x78 and 0x90.
MODEL 1 byte Device Model (According to table model).
SW_VER 2 bytes Software Version.
DATE_TIME 6 bytes GPS date & Time (Year + Month + Day + Hour + Minute + Second).
CELL 3 bytes Location Code ID (2 Bytes) + Serving Cell BSIC (1 Byte).
LAT 4 bytes 1 byte (integer) + 3 bytes (BCD).
LON 4 bytes 1 byte (integer) + 3bytes (BCD).
SPD 3 bytes 2 bytes (integer) + 1 byte (BCD).
CRS 3 bytes 2 bytes (integer) + 1 byte (BCD).
SATT_FIX 1 byte
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 ~ Bit 0
Fix Latitude Longitude Satellites count
+/- sign +/- sign
+ sign = 0, - sign = 1.
DIST 4 bytes Traveled distance in meter.
PWR_VOLT 2 bytes Voltage value of the Main Power:

1 byte (integer) + 1 byte (BCD).


I/O 1 byte
Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Out 2 Out1 Input 3 Input 2 Input1 Ignition
Ignition: 1 (ON), 0 (OFF).
Input1 ~ Input3: 1 (Ground, Shorted), 0 (Opened).
Out1 ~ Out2: 1 (Active), 0 (Inactive).
LEN 2 bytes Length of Data.
DATA Data from external RS232 device; Up to 500 bytes.
CHK_SUM 1 byte 8bit Checksum. Lower than 8 bit of the summation of DATA field.
H_METER 4 bytes Driving hour-meter.
BCK_VOLT 2 bytes Voltage value of backup battery.
MSG_TYPE 1 byte Report is real time (1); Report is storage (0).
ETX 0x03 End of zip data.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 104 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

<Example>
Original String :
ST300UEX;100850001;01;010;20081017;07:41:56;2F100;+37.478519;+126.886819; 032.512;000.00;9;1;500;15.
30;001100;25;Welcome to Suntech World!;12;2000;4.5;1;1750;012497F1160000;1

Zip Packet

Filed name Zip data Comment with string data


STX 0x02
PKT_LEN 0x00 0x71
HDR 0x16 ST300UEX
DEV_ID 0x10 0x08 0x50 0x00 0x10 100850001, BCD, MSB
MODEL 0x01 01
SW_VER 0x00 0x0a 010
DATE_TIME 0x08 0x0A 0x11 0x07 0x29 0x38 20081017;07:41:56
CELL 0x02 0xF1 0x00 2F100, BCD, MSB
LAT 0x25 0x47 0x85 0x19 +37.478519, Decimal part is BCD
LON 0x7E 0x88 0x68 0x19 +126.886819, Decimal part is BCD
SPD 0x00 0x20 0x51 032.512. Convert to 032.51
Decimal part is BCD, MSB
CRS 0x00 0x00 0x00 000.00, Decimal part is BCD, MSB
SATT_FIX 0x89 GPS fixed. Cell count = 9.
Lat. & Lon. sign = plus
DIST 0x00 0x00 0x01 0xF4 500. MSB
PWR_VOLT 0x0F 0x30 15.30. Decimal part is BCD, MSB
I/O 0x0c 001100
LEN 0x00 0x19 25
DATA 0x57 0x65 0x6C 0x63 0x6F 0x6D Welcome to Suntech World!
0x65 0x20 0x74 0x6F 0x20 0x53
0x75 0x6E 0x74 0x65 0x63 0x68
0x20 0x57 0x6F 0x72 0x6C 0x64
0x21
CHK_SUM 0x12 12
H_METER 0x00 0x000x07 0xD0 2000, MSB
BCK_VOLT 0x04 0x50 4.5
MSG_TYPE 0x01 1
RPM 0x06, 0xD6 1750, MSB
DID 0x01 0x24 0x97 0xF1 0x16 0x00 0x00 012497F1160000
DID_REG 0x01 1
ETX 0x03

6-8. Transferring Data to External RS232 Device

If the device receives this command and is connected with external appliance via RS232, it transfers the data to the
appliance connected via RS232.

Dont use software flow control, if you use RS232.

HDR DEV_ID VER LEN DATA CHK_SUM

Field Marks Value Meaning

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 105 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

HDR ST300DEX Command type.


DEV_ID 9 char Device ID.
VER 02 Protocol Version.
LEN Length of data.
DATA Up to 500bytes.
CHK_SUM 8bit Checksum. Lower than 8 bit of the summation of DATA
field.
<Example>
[command] ST300DEX;100850000;02;6;012345;2F
[response] ST300DEX;Res;100850000;010;25;012345;2F

<Note>
CHK_SUM is string converted from lower 8 bit of the summation of DATA field.
In case of the above example, value of 0 character in DATA field is equal to 0x30 in hex system, and 1 is equal
to 0x31 in hex system.

In this case, summation of DATA will be 0x12F (0x30+0x31+0x32+0x33+0x34+0x35), and CHK_SUM string will
be 2F.
And, the whole string from server will be ST300DEX;100850000;02;6;012345;2F.

If the DATA field includes 0x00 or 0x01, the server should convert and send as below.
Original Data: 0x30 0x31 0x00 0x32 0x01.
Conversion: 0x30 0x31 0x01 0x10 0x32 0x01 0x11.

6-9. Status String Reporting via SMS

6-9-1. In case of Back-up method

In case device is located in an area where it has good connectivity with GSM and without having good connectivity
with GPRS, it sends a string type report to its server. However, as soon as the bad connectivity between GPRS and
device gets back to normal, the device will try to send the reports to the server.

ST300 ST300A ST300H ST300R ST300C ST300K


ST340/LC
HDR HDR HDR HDR HDR HDR
DEV_ID DEV_ID DEV_ID DEV_ID DEV_ID DEV_ID
MODEL MODEL MODEL MODEL MODEL MODEL
SW_VER SW_VER SW_VER SW_VER SW_VER SW_VER
DATE1 DATE 1 DATE 1 DATE 1 DATE 1 DATE 1
TIME1 TIME 1 TIME 1 TIME 1 TIME 1 TIME 1
CELL1 CELL 1 CELL 1 CELL 1 CELL 1 CELL 1
LAT1 LAT 1 LAT 1 LAT 1 LAT 1 LAT 1
LON1 LON 1 LON 1 LON 1 LON 1 LON 1
SPD1 SPD 1 SPD 1 SPD 1 SPD 1 SPD 1
CRS1 CRS 1 CRS 1 CRS 1 CRS 1 CRS 1
SATT1 SATT 1 SATT 1 SATT 1 SATT 1 SATT 1
FIX1 FIX 1 FIX 1 FIX 1 FIX 1 FIX 1
DIST1 DIST 1 DIST 1 DIST 1 DIST 1 DIST 1
PWR_VOLT PWR_VOLT PWR_VOLT PWR_VOLT PWR_VOLT
PWR_VOLT1
1 1 1 1 1
I/O1 I/O 1 I/O 1 I/O 1 I/O 1 I/O 1
Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document
Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 106 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

MODE1 MODE 1 MODE 1 MODE 1 MODE 1 MODE 1


H_METER
H_METER1 H_METER 1 H_METER 1 H_METER 1 H_METER 1
1
BCK_VOLT
BCK_VOLT1 BCK_VOLT 1 BCK_VOLT 1 BCK_VOLT 1 BCK_VOLT 1
1
MSG_TYPE MSG_TYPE
MSG_TYPE1 MSG_TYPE 1 MSG_TYPE 1 MSG_TYPE 1
1 1
DATE2 ADC 1 RPM 1 ADC 1 ADC 1 ADC 1
TIME2 ADC1 1 DID 1 DATE 2 TO 1 TO 1
CELL2 ADC2 1 DID_REG 1 TIME 2 TF 1 TF 1
LAT2 DID 1 DATE 2 CELL 2 VS 1 VS 1
LON2 DID_REG 1 TIME 2 LAT 2 DATE 2 DID 1
SPD2 DATE 2 CELL 2 LON 2 TIME 2 DID_REG 1
CRS2 TIME 2 LAT 2 SPD 2 CELL 2 DATE 2
SATT2 CELL 2 LON 2 CRS 2 LAT 2 TIME 2
FIX2 LAT 2 SPD 2 SATT 2 LON 2 CELL 2
DIST2 LON 2 CRS 2 FIX 2 SPD 2 LAT 2
PWR_VOLT2 SPD 2 SATT 2 DIST 2 CRS 2 LON 2
I/O2 CRS 2 FIX 2 PWR_VOLT2 SATT 2 SPD 2
MODE2 SATT 2 DIST 2 I/O 2 FIX 2 CRS 2
H_METER2 FIX 2 PWR_VOLT MODE 2 DIST 2 SATT 2
2
BCK_VOLT2 DIST 2 I/O 2 H_METER 2 PWR_VOLT FIX 2
2
MSG_TYPE2 PWR_VOLT MODE 2 BCK_VOLT 2 I/O 2 DIST 2
2
I/O 2 H_METER 2 MSG_TYPE 2 MODE 2 PWR_VOLT
2
MODE 2 BCK_VOLT 2 ADC 2 H_METER 2 I/O 2
H_METER 2 MSG_TYPE 2 BCK_VOLT 2 MODE 2
BCK_VOLT 2 RPM 2 MSG_TYPE H_METER
2 2
MSG_TYPE 2 DID 2 ADC 2 BCK_VOLT
2
ADC 2 DID_REG 2 TO 2 MSG_TYPE
2
ADC1 2 TF 2 ADC 2
ADC2 2 VS 2 TO 2
DID 2 TF 2
DID_REG 2 VS 2
DID 2
DID_REG 2

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 107 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

ST300P ST300F ST300D ST300V ST340R


HDR HDR HDR HDR HDR
DEV_ID DEV_ID DEV_ID DEV_ID DEV_ID
MODEL MODEL MODEL MODEL MODEL
SW_VER SW_VER SW_VER SW_VER SW_VER
DATE 1 DATE 1 DATE 1 DATE 1 DATE1
TIME 1 TIME 1 TIME 1 TIME 1 TIME1
CELL 1 CELL 1 CELL 1 CELL 1 CELL1
LAT 1 LAT 1 LAT 1 LAT 1 LAT1
LON 1 LON 1 LON 1 LON 1 LON1
SPD 1 SPD 1 SPD 1 SPD 1 SPD1
CRS 1 CRS 1 CRS 1 CRS 1 CRS1
SATT 1 SATT 1 SATT 1 SATT 1 SATT1
FIX 1 FIX 1 FIX 1 FIX 1 FIX1
DIST 1 DIST 1 DIST 1 DIST 1 DIST1
PWR_VOLT 1 PWR_VOLT 1 PWR_VOLT 1 PWR_VOLT 1 PWR_VOLT1
I/O 1 I/O 1 I/O 1 I/O 1 I/O1
MODE 1 MODE 1 MODE 1 MODE 1 MODE1
H_METER 1 H_METER 1 H_METER 1 H_METER 1 H_METER1
BCK_VOLT 1 BCK_VOLT 1 BCK_VOLT 1 BCK_VOLT 1 BCK_VOLT1
MSG_TYPE 1 MSG_TYPE 1 MSG_TYPE 1 MSG_TYPE 1 MSG_TYPE1
TPS_IN1 ADC 1 ADC 1 ADC 1 DATE2
TPS_OUT1 FUEL1 1 DID 1 TLS_IN 1 TIME2
TPS_S1_IN1 FUEL2 1 DID_REG 1 TLS_OUT 1 CELL2
TPS_S1_OUT1 DATE 2 DATE 2 DATE 2 LAT2
TPS_S2_IN1 TIME 2 TIME 2 TIME 2 LON2
TPS_S2_OUT1 CELL 2 CELL 2 CELL 2 SPD2
DATE 2 LAT 2 LAT 2 LAT 2 CRS2
TIME 2 LON 2 LON 2 LON 2 SATT2
CELL 2 SPD 2 SPD 2 SPD 2 FIX2
LAT 2 CRS 2 CRS 2 CRS 2 DIST2
LON 2 SATT 2 SATT 2 SATT 2 PWR_VOLT2
SPD 2 FIX 2 FIX 2 FIX 2 I/O2
CRS 2 DIST 2 DIST 2 DIST 2 MODE2
SATT 2 PWR_VOLT 2 PWR_VOLT 2 PWR_VOLT2 H_METER2
FIX 2 I/O 2 I/O 2 I/O 2 BCK_VOLT2
DIST 2 MODE 2 MODE 2 MODE 2 MSG_TYPE2
PWR_VOLT 2 H_METER 2 H_METER 2 H_METER 2
I/O 2 BCK_VOLT 2 BCK_VOLT 2 BCK_VOLT 2
MODE 2 MSG_TYPE 2 MSG_TYPE 2 MSG_TYPE 2
H_METER 2 ADC 2 ADC 2 ADC 2
BCK_VOLT 2 FUEL1 2 DID 2 TLS_IN 2
MSG_TYPE 2 FUEL2 2 DID_REG 2 TLS_OUT 2
TPS_IN2
TPS_OUT2
TPS_S1_IN2
TPS_S1_OUT2
TPS_S2_IN2
TPS_S2_OUT2

(Note: STT String sent via SMS does not include the message number field.)
Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document
Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 108 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

6-9-2. In case of Main method

Device sends to its server status string via SMS when it can be connected with the server only via SMS without
being connected with GPRS.

ST300 ST300A ST300H ST300R ST300C ST300K


ST340/LC
HDR HDR HDR HDR HDR HDR
DEV_ID DEV_ID DEV_ID DEV_ID DEV_ID DEV_ID
MODEL MODEL MODEL MODEL MODEL MODEL
SW_VER SW_VER SW_VER SW_VER SW_VER SW_VER
DATE DATE DATE DATE DATE DATE
TIME TIME TIME TIME TIME TIME
CELL CELL CELL CELL CELL CELL
LAT LAT LAT LAT LAT LAT
LON LON LON LON LON LON
SPD SPD SPD SPD SPD SPD
CRS CRS CRS CRS CRS CRS
SATT SATT SATT SATT SATT SATT
FIX FIX FIX FIX FIX FIX
DIST DIST DIST DIST DIST DIST
PWR_VOLT PWR_VOLT PWR_VOLT PWR_VOLT PWR_VOLT PWR_VOLT
I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O
MODE MODE MODE MODE MODE MODE
MSG_NO MSG_NO MSG_NO MSG_NO MSG_NO MSG_NO
H_METER H_METER H_METER H_METER H_METER H_METER
BCK_VOLT BCK_VOLT BCK_VOLT BCK_VOLT BCK_VOLT BCK_VOLT
MSG_TYPE MSG_TYPE MSG_TYPE MSG_TYPE MSG_TYPE MSG_TYPE
DID RPM ADC ADC ADC
DID_REG DID TO TO
ADC1 DID_REG TF TF
ADC2 VS VS
DID
DID_REG

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 109 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

ST300P ST300F ST300D ST300V ST340R


HDR HDR HDR HDR HDR
DEV_ID DEV_ID DEV_ID DEV_ID DEV_ID
MODEL MODEL MODEL MODEL MODEL
SW_VER SW_VER SW_VER SW_VER SW_VER
DATE DATE DATE DATE DATE
TIME TIME TIME TIME TIME
CELL CELL CELL CELL CELL
LAT LAT LAT LAT LAT
LON LON LON LON LON
SPD SPD SPD SPD SPD
CRS CRS CRS CRS CRS
SATT SATT SATT SATT SATT
FIX FIX FIX FIX FIX
DIST DIST DIST DIST DIST
PWR_VOLT PWR_VOLT PWR_VOLT PWR_VOLT PWR_VOLT
I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O
MODE MODE MODE MODE MODE
H_METER MSG_NO MSG_NO MSG_NO MSG_NO
BCK_VOLT H_METER H_METER H_METER H_METER
MSG_TYPE BCK_VOLT BCK_VOLT BCK_VOLT BCK_VOLT
TPS_IN MSG_TYPE MSG_TYPE MSG_TYPE MSG_TYPE
TPS_OUT ADC ADC ADC
TPS_S1_IN FUEL1 DID TLS_IN
TPS_S1_OUT FUEL2 DID_REG TLS_OUT
TPS_S2_IN
TPS_S2_OUT

6-10. Location query sent via smart phone

If you are a smart phone user, you can use it to easily find the current location on the Google map, just send one of
the following messages by your smart phone:

Where are you, whereareyou, Where r u, whereru

And, then the Google Map will be responding to you by sending the address on your smart phone. You can see the
current location of ST300/ST340 just by opening the message containing that address on the web browser.

In order to enable ST300/ST340 to accept your SMS message, you have to add your smart phone number to one of
the 4 optional numbers such as SMS_MT1 to SMS_MT4 or disable SMS_LOCK. Refer to Chapter 4-4 of this Manual,
GSM Parameter Setting for more details. Before you start using this function, you should get to know the URL
(server address) of the Google map first.

You can have more information about how to get the server address of the Google map in section Command to Get
Google Map Address of this document.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 110 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

6-11. Coin Machine Report

This report is made only by ST300B which supports Coin Machine.

When Ignition OFF is made, device sends to the server this coin machine report as defined already in the course
of configuring device.

ST300B
HDR
DEV_ID
MODEL
SW_VER
DATE
TIME
CELL
LAT
LON
SPD
CRS
SATT
FIX
DIST
PWR_VOLT
I/O
MODE
TOTAL_COIN
MSG_NUM

6-11-1. Normal

Field Marks Meaning


HDR ST300COI Header of Status Report.
DEV_ID 9 char Device ID.
MODEL 2 char Device Model (According to table model).
SW_VER 3 char Number of the released Software Version.
DATE 8 char GPS date (yyyymmdd)

Year + Month + Day


TIME 8 char. GPS time (hh:mm:ss)

Hour : Minute : Second


CELL String Location Code ID (3 digits hex) + Serving Cell BSIC(2 digits decimal).
LAT String Latitude (+/-xx.xxxxxx).
LON String Longitude (+/-xxx.xxxxxx).
SPD String Speed in km/h
CRS String Course on the ground in degree.
SATT String Number of satellites.
FIX 1 or 0 GPS is fixed (1); GPS is not fixed (0).
DIST String Traveled distance in meter.
Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document
Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 111 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

PWR_VOLT String Voltage value of the main power.


I/O 6 char Current I/O status of the inputs and the outputs:

Ignition + Input1 + Input 2 + Input 3 + Out1 + Out2.


Ignition: 1 (ON), 0 (OFF).
Input1 ~ Input3: 1 (Ground, Shorted), 0 (Opened).
Out1 ~ Out2: 1 (Active), 0 (Inactive).
MODE 1 char Only 0
TOTAL_COIN String Total coin value

This value will be reset to 0 when Ignition is OFF.


MSG_NUM 4 char Message number

After 9999 is reported, message number returns to 0000.


<Example>

ST300B
ST300COI;205121212;09;576;20150526;00:57:11;00000;+37.479318;+126.887826;000.006;000.00;12;1;42;12.
25;000000;0;0000000000;0151

<Note>
Coin Machine reports are sent when Ignition OFF only.

6-11-2. Zip

Field Marks Meaning


STX 0x02 Start of zip data.
PKT_LEN 2 bytes Length of zip data, excluding STX, PKT_LEN and ETX.
HDR 0x21 Header of Status Report.
DEV_ID 5 bytes Device ID

BCD format.

If the Device ID is 123456789, this field will be filled with 0x12, 0x34, 0x56
0x78 and 0x90.
MODEL 1byte Device Model (According to table model).
SW_VER 2 bytes Software Version.
DATE_TIME 6 bytes GPS date & Time (Year + Month + Day + Hour + Minute + Second).
CELL 3 bytes Location Code ID (2 bytes) + Serving Cell BSIC (1 byte).
LAT 4 bytes 1 byte (integer) + 3 bytes (BCD).
LON 4 bytes 1 byte (integer) + 3 bytes (BCD).
SPD 3 bytes 2 bytes (integer) + 1 byte (BCD).
CRS 3 bytes 2 bytes (integer) + 1 byte (BCD).
SATT_FIX 1 byte
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 ~ Bit 0
Fix Latitude Longitude Satellites count
+/- sign +/- sign
+ sign = 0, - sign = 1.

DIST 4 bytes Traveled distance in meter.


PWR_VOLT 2 bytes Voltage value of the main power
Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document
Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 112 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

1 byte (integer) + 1 byte (decimal, BCD)


I/O 1 byte
Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Out 2 Out1 Input 3 Input 2 Input1 Ignition
Ignition: 1 (ON), 0 (OFF).
Input1 ~ Input3: 1 (Ground, Shorted), 0 (Opened).
Out1 ~ Out2: 1 (Active), 0 (Inactive).

In case of ST300V
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Out 3 Out2 Out1 In 4 In 3 In 2 In 1 Ignition
Ignition: 1 (ON), 0 (OFF).
Input1 ~ Input4: 1 (Ground, Shorted), 0 (Opened).
Out1 ~ Out3: 1 (Active), 0 (Inactive).
MODE 1 byte 1 = Parking mode.
2 = Driving Mode.
4 = Distance.
5 = Angle.
TOTAL_COIN 4 bytes Total coin value

This value will be reset to 0 when Ignition is OFF.


MSG_NUM 2 bytes Message number.

After 9999, the message number returns to 0.


<Example>

Original String :
ST300COI;100850001;01;010;20081017;07:41:56;00000;+37.478519;+126.886819;032.512;000.00;9;1;500;15.
30;001100;1;0000000000;0072

Zip Packet

Filed name Zip data Comment with string data


STX 0x02
PKT_LEN 0x00 0x3c
HDR 0x21 ST300COI
DEV_ID 0x10 0x08 0x50 0x00 0x10 100850001, BCD, MSB
MODEL 0x01 01
SW_VER 0x00 0x0a 010
DATE_TIME 0x08 0x0a 0x11 0x07 0x29 0x38 20081017;07:41:56
CELL 0x02 0xF1 0x00 2F100, BCD, MSB
LAT 0x25 0x47 0x85 0x19 +37.478519, Decimal part is BCD
LON 0x7e 0x88 0x68 0x19 +126.886819, Decimal part is BCD
SPD 0x00 0x20 0x51 032.512. Convert to 032.51
Decimal part is BCD, MSB
CRS 0x00 0x00 0x00 000.00, Decimal part is BCD, MSB
SATT_FIX 0x89 GPS fixed. Cell count = 9.
Lat. & Lon. sign = plus
DIST 0x00 0x00 0x01 0xF4 500. MSB
PWR_VOLT 0x0F 0x30 15.30. Decimal part is BCD, MSB
I/O 0x0c 001100
MODE 0x01 1
TOTAM_COIN 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
MSG_NUM 0x00 0x48 0072, MSB

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 113 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

6-12. Journey Summary Report


This report is made only by ST300C which supports J1939 CAN for Benz.

When Ignition OFF is made, device sends to the server this Journey Summary Report as defined already in the
course of configuring device.

ST300C
HDR
DEV_ID
MODEL
SW_VER
BRAKE
ODOMETER
AVE_FUEL_ECO
AVE_RPM
AVE_SPEED
CLUTCH
TOTAL_IDLE
ENGINE_HOURS
TOTAL_FUEL
TOTAL_FUEL_IDLE
AVE_TEMP

6-12-1. Normal

Field Marks Meaning


HDR ST300JSR Header of Status Report.
DEV_ID 9 char Device ID.
MODEL 2 char Device Model (According to table model).
SW_VER 3 char Number of the released Software Version.
BRAKE String How many times pushing brake pedal.
This value will be increasing when brake pedal push more than 1second.
ODOMETER String Odometer value for Ignition ON to Ignition OFF.
AVE_FUEL_ECO String Average fuel economy value for Ignition ON to Ignition OFF.
AVE_RPM String Average RPM value for Ignition ON to Ignition OFF.
AVE_SPEED String Average speed value for Ignition ON to Ignition OFF.
String How many times pushing clutch pedal.
CLUTCH
This value will be increasing when clutch pedal push more than 1second.
TOTAL_IDLE String Total idle times value for Ignition ON to Ignition OFF.
ENGINE_HOURS String Total engine hours value for Ignition ON to Ignition OFF.
TOTAL_FUEL String Total using fuel value for Ignition ON to Ignition OFF.
TOTAL_FUEL_IDLE String Total using fuel in idle value for Ignition ON to Ignition OFF.
AVE_TEMP String Average engine temperature value for Ignition ON to Ignition OFF.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 114 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

<Example>

ST300C
ST300JSR;205326326;11;596;10;12345.678;12.345;1234.567;12.345;20;123;12.345;12.345;1.234;12.345

<Note>
Journey Summary Report is sent when Ignition OFF only.

6-12-2. Zip

Field Marks Meaning


STX 0x02 Start of zip data.
PKT_LEN 2 bytes Length of zip data, excluding STX, PKT_LEN and ETX.
HDR 0x22 Header of Status Report.
DEV_ID 5 bytes Device ID

BCD format.

If the Device ID is 123456789, this field will be filled with 0x12, 0x34, 0x56
0x78 and 0x90.
MODEL 1byte Device Model (According to table model).
SW_VER 2 bytes Software Version.
BRAKE 4 bytes How many times pushing brake pedal.
This value will be increasing when brake pedal push more than 1second.

4 bytes (integer)
ODOMETER 3 bytes Odometer value for Ignition ON to Ignition OFF.

2 bytes (integer) + 1 byte (BCD).


3 bytes Average fuel economy value for Ignition ON to Ignition OFF.
AVE_FUEL_ECO
2 bytes (integer) + 1 byte (BCD).
3 bytes Average RPM value for Ignition ON to Ignition OFF.
AVE_RPM
2 bytes (integer) + 1 byte (BCD).
3 bytes Average speed value for Ignition ON to Ignition OFF.
AVE_SPEED
2 bytes (integer) + 1 byte (BCD).
4 bytes How many times pushing clutch pedal.
This value will be increasing when clutch pedal push more than 1second.
CLUTCH
4 bytes (integer)
4 bytes Total idle times value for Ignition ON to Ignition OFF.
TOTAL_IDLE
4 bytes (integer)
3 bytes Total engine hours value for Ignition ON to Ignition OFF.
ENGINE_HOURS
2 bytes (integer) + 1 byte (BCD).
3 bytes Total using fuel value for Ignition ON to Ignition OFF.
TOTAL_FUEL
2 bytes (integer) + 1 byte (BCD).
Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document
Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 115 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

3 bytes Total using fuel in idle value for Ignition ON to Ignition OFF.
TOTAL_FUEL_IDLE
2 bytes (integer) + 1 byte (BCD).
3 bytes Average engine temperature value for Ignition ON to Ignition OFF.
AVE_TEMP
2 bytes (integer) + 1 byte (BCD).

<Example>

Original String :
ST300JSR;205326326;11;596;10;12345.678;12.345;1234.567;12.345;20;123;12.345;12.345;1.234;12.345

Zip Packet

Filed name Zip data Comment with string data


STX 0x02
PKT_LEN 0x00 0x3c
HDR 0x22 ST300JSR
DEV_ID 0x20 0x53 0x26 0x32 0x60 205326326, BCD, MSB
MODEL 0x0b 11
SW_VER 0x02 0x54 596
BRAKE 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x0a 10
ODOMETER 0x30 0x39 0x67 12345.678, Decimal part is BCD
AVE_FUEL_ECO 0x00 0x0c 0x34 12.345, Decimal part is BCD
AVE_RPM 0x04 0xd2 0x56 1234.567, Decimal part is BCD
AVE_SPEED 0x00 0x0c 0x34 12.345, Decimal part is BCD
CLUTCH 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x14 20,
TOTAL_IDLE 0x00 0x00 0x02 0x91 123,
ENGINE_HOURS 0x00 0x0c 0x34 12.345, Decimal part is BCD
TOTAL_FUEL 0x00 0x0c 0x34 12.345, Decimal part is BCD
TOTAL_FUEL_IDLE 0x00 0x01 0x23 1.234, Decimal part is BCD
AVE_TEMP 0x00 0x0c 0x34 12.345, Decimal part is BCD

6-13. Histogram Report

This report is working only ST300A, ST300D, ST300H.

6-13-1. Normal

HDR DEV_ID MODEL SW_VER DATE TIME PWR_VOLT BCK_VOLT MSG_TYPE

AVERAGE_SPD MAX_SPD TIME_OVER_SPD HISTOGRAM TOTAL_TIME

Definition : String to report information of current travel when ignition is OFF (starts parking).

Field Marks Remark


HDR ST300HIS Status report header
DEV_ID 9 char. Device ID
MODEL 2 Char Device Model (According to table model)
SW_VER 3 char. Software Release Version
Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document
Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 116 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

DATE 8 char. GPS date (yyyymmdd)


Year + Month + Day
TIME 8 char. GPS time (hh:mm:ss)
Hour : Minute : Second
PWR_VOLT String Voltage value of main power
BCK_VOLT String Voltage value of backup battery
MSG_TYPE 1 char Report is real time (1), Report is storage (0)
AVERAGE_SPD String Average speed(in km/h)
MAX_SPD String Maximum speed (in km/h)
TIME_OVER_SPD String Accumulated time that the car exceeded over-speed (in second)
00km/h Second Histogram of speed 00km/h ~ 09km/h
10km/h Second Histogram of speed 10km/h ~ 19km/h
20km/h Second Histogram of speed 20km/h ~ 29km/h
30km/h Second Histogram of speed 30km/h ~ 39km/h
40km/h Second Histogram of speed 40km/h ~ 49km/h
50km/h Second Histogram of speed 50km/h ~ 59km/h
60km/h Second Histogram of speed 60km/h ~ 69km/h
70km/h Second Histogram of speed 70km/h ~ 79km/h
80km/h Second Histogram of speed 80km/h ~ 89km/h
90km/h Second Histogram of speed 90km/h ~ 99km/h
100km/h Second Histogram of speed 100km/h ~ 109km/h
110km/h Second Histogram of speed 110km/h ~ 119km/h
120km/h Second Histogram of speed 120km/h ~ 129km/h
130km/h Second Histogram of speed 130km/h ~ 139km/h
140km/h Second Histogram of speed 140km/h ~ 149km/h
150km/h Second Histogram of speed 150km/h ~ 159km/h
160km/h Second Histogram of speed 160km/h ~ 169km/h
170km/h Second Histogram of speed 170km/h ~ 179km/h
180km/h Second Histogram of speed 180km/h ~ 189km/h
190km/h Second Histogram of speed 190km/h ~ 199km/h
200km/h Second Histogram of speed over 200km/h
TOTAL_TIME Second The total time that device stayed without GPS fix
<example>
ST300HIS;600850000;02;010;20110101;00:13:52;12.28;4.1;1;70;100;500;10;10;10;10;10;10;10;10;10;10;10;10
;10;10;10;10;10;10;10;10;10;180

6-13-2. Zip

Field Marks Meaning


STX 0x02 Start of zip data
PKT_LEN 2 Bytes Length of zip data, HDR to MSG_TYPE
HDR 0x1e Header of Histogram Report
DEV_ID 5 bytes Device ID
BCD format

If the Device ID is 123456789, this field will befilled with 0x12, 0x34, 0x56
0x78 and 0x90.
MODEL 1byte Device Model (According to table model)
SW_VER 2 byte Software Version
DATE_TIME 6 bytes GPS date & Time (Year + Month + Day + Hour + Minute + Second)
Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document
Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 117 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

PWR_VOLT 2 bytes Voltage value of main power


BCK_VOLT 2 bytes Voltage value of backup battery
MSG_TYPE 1 byte Report is real time (1), Report is storage (0)
AVERAGE_SPD 3 bytes 2 bytes (integer) + 1 byte (BCD)
MAX_SPD 3 bytes 2 bytes (integer) + 1 byte (BCD)
TIME_OVER_SPD 4 bytes Accumulated time that the car exceeded over-speed in this travel.
(in second)
00km/h 2 bytes Histogram of speed 00km/h ~ 09km/h
10km/h 2 bytes Histogram of speed 10km/h ~ 19km/h
20km/h 2 bytes Histogram of speed 20km/h ~ 29km/h
30km/h 2 bytes Histogram of speed 30km/h ~ 39km/h
40km/h 2 bytes Histogram of speed 40km/h ~ 49km/h
50km/h 2 bytes Histogram of speed 50km/h ~ 59km/h
60km/h 2 bytes Histogram of speed 60km/h ~ 69km/h
70km/h 2 bytes Histogram of speed 70km/h ~ 79km/h
80km/h 2 bytes Histogram of speed 80km/h ~ 89km/h
90km/h 2 bytes Histogram of speed 90km/h ~ 99km/h
100km/h 2 bytes Histogram of speed 100km/h ~ 109km/h
110km/h 2 bytes Histogram of speed 110km/h ~ 119km/h
120km/h 2 bytes Histogram of speed 120km/h ~ 129km/h
130km/h 2 bytes Histogram of speed 130km/h ~ 139km/h
140km/h 2 bytes Histogram of speed 140km/h ~ 149km/h
150km/h 2 bytes Histogram of speed 150km/h ~ 159km/h
160km/h 2 bytes Histogram of speed 160km/h ~ 169km/h
170km/h 2 bytes Histogram of speed 170km/h ~ 179km/h
180km/h 2 bytes Histogram of speed 180km/h ~ 189km/h
190km/h 2 bytes Histogram of speed 190km/h ~ 199km/h
200km/h 2 bytes Histogram of speed over 200km/h
TOTAL_TIME 4 bytes The total time that device stayed without GPS fix
ETX 0x03 End of zip data.
<Example>

Original String :
ST300HIS;205956956;05;503;20150615;08:23:35;12.36;0.0;1;000.007;000.007;0;10;0;0;0;0;0;0;0;0;0;0;0;0;0;0;
0;0;0;0;0;0;180

Zip Packet
0x02
0x00 0x48
0x1e
0x20 0x59 0x56 0x95 0x60
0x05
0x01 0xf7
0x0f 0x06 0x0f 0x08 0x17 0x23
0x0c 0x36
0x00 0x00
0x01
0x00 0x00 0x00
0x00 0x00 0x00
0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
0x00 0x0a
0x00 0x00
0x00 0x00
0x00 0x00
Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document
Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 118 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

0x00 0x00
0x00 0x00
0x00 0x00
0x00 0x00
0x00 0x00
0x00 0x00
0x00 0x00
0x00 0x00
0x00 0x00
0x00 0x00
0x00 0x00
0x00 0x00
0x00 0x00
0x00 0x00
0x00 0x00
0x00 0x00
0x00 0x00
0x00 0x00 0x00 0xb4
0x03

6-14. Summarized data packet of GPS LOG

This report is working only ST300A, ST300D, ST300H.

HDR DEV_ID VER LEN DATA CHK_SUM

Definition:

Field Marks Unit Remark


HDR ST300LOG Command type
DEV_ID 9 char. Device ID
VER 3 char Protocol Version
LEN 2 Bytes Length of data
DATA Compressed summarized data packet.
CHK_SUM 8bit Checksum
<Note>
Command : Log Data Packet Request
ST300CMD;000000000;02;LOGREQ;YYMMDDhhmm;YYMMDDhhmmr;

Response
1. In case that ST300 has the log data

ST300CMD;Res;000000000;390;LOGREQ;OK

ST300LOG;000000000;390;[len];[Data packet 1];[chksum]


ST300LOG;000000000;390;[len];[Data packet 2];[chksum]
ST300LOG;000000000;390;[len];[Data packet 3];[chksum]
ST300LOG;000000000;390;[len];[Data packet 4];[chksum]
.
ST300CMD;Res;000000000;390;LOGREQ;FINISH

2. In case that ST300 has no log data


Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document
Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 119 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

ST300CMD;Res;000000000;390;LOGREQ;EMPTY

Command : Log Data Packet Cancel


ST300CMD;000000000;02;LOGCANCEL

Response :
ST300CMD;Res;000000000;390;LOGCANCEL;OK

Data packet : 7 bytes + 20 bytes + (5*(N-1)) bytes


- TIME : 5 bytes
Year 1byte : integer 0~255
Month 1byte : integer 1~12
Day 1byte : integer 1~31
Hour 1byte : integer 0~23
Minute 1byte : integer 0~59
Second 1byte : integer 0~59
Sampling Time 1byte : 1~30
- GPS LOG Data Header : 20 bytes
Initial Position
Latitude 8bytes : double
Longitude 8bytes : double
Initial Speed 4bytes : float
- GPS LOG Data Body : 5 bytes * (N-1)(Sampling)
Delta Position
Delta Latitude 2bytes : integer -32768~32768
Delta Longitude 2bytes : integer -32768~32768
Delta Speed 1bytes : integer -127~128

Current Position = Initial Position + (Delta Position * 0.000001)


Current Speed = Initial Position + Delta Speed

<note>

If the SPD_TIME = 0 the device store the data. The maximum time you can request is 2 hours and the
device can store the data during 10 hours.
If the SPD_TIME is 1 ~ 4 the device cant store the data.

6-15. Crash Reconstruction

This report is working only ST300A, ST300D, ST300H.

HDR DEV_ID VER LEN DATA CHK_SUM

Definition :

Field Marks Unit Remark


HDR ST300CRR Command type

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 120 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

DEV_ID 9 char. Device ID


VER 3 char Protocol Version
LEN 2 bytes Length of data
DATA 786 byres Compressed summarized data packet for 1 hour
CHK_SUM 1 byte 8bit Checksum
<example>
ST300CRR;000000000;02;LEN;DATA;CHK_SUM

<note>
Data packet
Time : 6bytes
Year 1byte : Integer
Month 1byte : Integer
Day 1byte : Integer
Hour 1byte : Integer
Minute 1byte : Integer
Second 1byte : Integer
Crash Reconstruction Data : 26bytes * 30sec = 780 bytes
Latitude 4bytes : double float : 8bytes
Longitude 4bytes : double float : 8bytes
Speed 4bytes : float : 4bytes
Accelerometer X-Axis : integer : 2bytes
Accelerometer Y-Axis : integer : 2bytes
Accelerometer Z-Axis : integer : 2bytes

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 121 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

7. Command for General Use

After device is configured, user may need to check/query values of the parameters if he/she wants to change those
values. This chapter shows user how to change the parameters values that have been set already.

7-1. Common parts of this command

HDR DEV_ID VER CMD_ID

Field Marks Value Meaning


HDR ST300CMD Command type.
DEV_ID 9 char Device ID.
VER 02 Protocol Version.
CMD_ID String

**Caution: If Device ID is not correct, this command will be ignored by the device.

7-2. Requesting Status

Once this command is made, some interactions will be made between the server and the device as described in the
Meaning section of the table below.

Field Mark Value Meaning


CMD_ID StatusReq Requesting Status of the device

If device receives this Request command from the server, it


sends the Status string to the server promptly.
<Example>
[command] ST300CMD;100850000;02;StatusReq
[response] ST300STT;100850000;01;010;20081017;07:41:56;00100;+37.478519;+126.886819;000.012;
000.00;9;1;0;15.30;001100;1;0072;0;4.5;1

7-3.Re-setting (Restoring to factory defaults and Rebooting)

Once this command is made, some interactions will be made between the server and the device as described in the
Meaning section of the table below.

Field Mark Value Meaning


CMD_ID Reset Re-setting the current parameters values

This command is used to initialize all the parameters with the


values set in the factory of the devices and to reboot the device.
<Example>
[command] ST300CMD;100850000;02;Reset
[response] ST300CMD;Res;100850000;010;Reset

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 122 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

7-4. Pre-setting

Once this command is made, some interactions will be made between the server and the device as described in the
Meaning section of the table below.

Field Mark Value Meaning


CMD_ID Preset Report parameters setting values and current device status
Response includes network, report, event, GSM and Service
parameters included in SyncTrak. It includes status of device
as well.
<Example>
[command] ST300CMD;100850000;02;Preset

[response] ST300CMD;Res;100850000;010;Preset;
NTW;0;internet;;;111.111.111.111;8600;;;;1234;
RPT;60;180;120;60;3;0;0;;;;
EVT;1;60;0;3;2;2;30;20;20;1;1;1;0;0;0;0;0;0;0;0;0;0;0;0;
GSM;0;;;;;0;;;;;;;;
SVC;1;120;0;0;0;0;1;1;1;0;0;0;0
DEV;0;0;0;0

[response] Model - Event 4 Line


NTW;0;internet;;;111.111.111.111;8600;;;;1234;
RPT;60;180;120;60;3;0;0;;;;
EVT;1;60;0;3;8;8;30;0;0;6;6;1;0;0;0;0;0;0;0;0;0;0;0;0;
GSM;0;;;;;0;;;;;;;;
SVC;1;120;0;0;0;0;1;1;1;0;0;0;0
DEV;0;0;0;0

<Note>
** After power is on, the device sends to the server response string of the Preset once.

** The DEV field informs the server about the current status of the device as below.
OUT1 OUT2 PWR_DN BAT_CON
0 = Disable 0 = Disable 0 = Normal 0 = Backup battery is disconnected.
1 = Enable 1 = Enable 1 = Sleep 1 = Backup battery is connected.
2 = Deep sleep

Field Mark Value Meaning


CMD_ID PresetA Report all the parameters including additional parameter.
<Example>

[command] ST300CMD;100850000;02;PresetA

[response] ST300CMD;Res;100850000;010;PresetA;
NTW;0;internet;;;111.111.111.111;8600;;;;1234;
RPT;60;180;120;60;3;0;0;;;;
EVT;1;60;0;3;2;2;30;20;20;1;1;1;0;0;0;0;0;0;0;0;0;0;0;0;
LTM;0;3;1;
GSM;0;;;;;0;;;;;;;;
SVC;1;120;0;0;0;0;1;1;1;0;0;0;0;
ADP;U;T;2;9000;0;0;0;0;0;0;
MSR;10;0.10;0.10;0.70;
MBV;9.43;21.07;17.07;8.00;18.00;0.00;0.00;
Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document
Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 123 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

NPT;02;0;0;0;0;0;500;300;5;10;5;10;
DEV;0;0;0;0;0;0;0;0

<Note>

** This command starts being applicable to the Software Version 22.


** DEV field informs the server about the current status of the device as below.

OUT1 OUT2 PWR_DN BAT_CON


0 = Disable 0 = Disable 0 = Normal 0 = Backup battery is disconnected.
1 = Enable 1 = Enable 1 = Sleep 1 = Backup battery is connected.
2 = Deep sleep

TRACKING Anti-Theft Reserved Reserved


0 = Stop Tracking 0 = Disable
1 = Start Tracking 1 = Enable

7-5. ACK of Emergency

Once this command is made by the server, the device will stop reporting about the occurrence of emergency. More
details are described in the Meaning section of the table below.

Field Mark Value Meaning


CMD_ID AckEmerg Acknowledge of emergency report

The server sends device this command as a response to inform


the device that the server has completed receiving all the
emergency reports. And then, the device will stop sending
Emergency reports if it is in emergency state.
<Example>
[command] ST300CMD;100850000;02;AckEmerg
[response] ST300CMD;Res;100850000;010;AckEmerg

7-6. Enable1 (Activating Output 1)

[EXTRA_INFO]
HDR DEV_ID SW_VER DATE TIME CELL LAT LON SPD CRS

SATT FIX DIST PER_VOLT I/O MODE

Field Mark Value Meaning


CMD_ID Enable1 Enable Output1
<Example>
[command] ST300CMD;100850000;02;Enable1
[response] ST300CMD;Res;100850000;010;Enable1;[EXTRA_INFO]
[EXTRA_INFO : Extra information]
20140213;05:16:03;04f54;+37.479630;+126.886010;000.000;000.00;0;0;3095;13.43;000000;1

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 124 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

[response] SA300CMD;Res;100850000;010;Enable1NoUse (in case that IN type is set to No Use).

<Note>
** Output1 line goes to active status.
** If OUT1 is set with immobilizer, output1 line goes to the Active Status gradually with pulse in driving mode.
** If OUT1 is set with pulse type, output1 line generates pulse and automatically returns to the Inactive State after
pulsing out.

7-7. Disable1 (Inactivating Output1)

Field Mark Value Meaning


CMD_ID Disable1 Disable Output1
<Example>
[command] ST300CMD;100850000;02;Disable1
[response] ST300CMD;Res;100850000;010;Disable1; EXTRA_INFO
[response] ST300CMD;Res;100850000;010;Disable1NoUse (in case that IN type is set to No Use).

<Note>
** Output1 line goes to the Inactive Status.

7-8. Enable2 (Activating Output 2)

Field Mark Value Meaning


CMD_ID Enable2 Enable Output2
<Example>
[command] ST300CMD;100850000;02;Enable2
[response] ST300CMD;Res;100850000;010;Enable2; EXTRA_INFO
[response] SA300CMD;Res;100850000;010;Enable2NoUse (in case that IN type is set to No Use).

<Note>

** Output2 line goes to the Active Status.


** If OUT2 is set to immobilizer, output2 line goes to the Active Status gradually with pulse in driving mode.
** If OUT2 is set to the pulse type, output2 Line generates pulse and automatically returns to the Inactive State
after pulsing out.

7-9. Disable2 (Inactivating Output2)

Field Mark Value Meaning


CMD_ID Disable2 Disable Output2
<Example>
[command] ST300CMD;100850000;02;Disable2
[response] ST300CMD;Res;100850000;010;Disable2; EXTRA_INFO
[response] ST300CMD;Res;100850000;010;Disable2NoUse (in case that IN type is set to No Use).

<Note>
** Output2 line goes to the Inactive Status.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 125 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

7-10. Enable3 (Activating Output 3)

Field Mark Value Meaning


CMD_ID Enable3 Enable Output3
<Example>
[command] ST300CMD;100850000;02;Enable3
[response] ST300CMD;Res;100850000;010;Enable3
[response] ST300CMD;Res;100850000;010;Enable3NoUse (in case that out type is set to No Use).

<Note>

** Output3 line goes to the Active Status.


** If OUT3 is set to immobilizer, output3 line goes to the Active Status gradually with pulse in driving mode.

** This command does not work on the ST340R model.

7-11. Disable3 (Inactivating Output3)

Field Mark Value Meaning


CMD_ID Disable3 Disable Output3
<Example>
[command] ST300CMD;100850000;02;Disable3
[response] ST300CMD;Res;100850000;010;Disable3
[response] ST300CMD;Res;100850000;010;Disable3NoUse (in case that out type is set to No Use).

<Note>
** Output3 line goes to the Inactive Status.
** This command does not work on the ST340R model.

7-12. Requesting IMSI

Once this command is made, some interactions will be made between the server and the device as described in the
Meaning section of the table as below.

Field Mark Value Meaning


CMD_ID ReqIMSI The server sends the device this command requesting IMSI
(International Mobile Subscriber Identity) if the server wants to
receive IMSI from the device.
If the device receives the command from the server, it sends
the IMSI to the server.
<Example>
[command] ST300CMD;100850000;02;ReqIMSI
[response] ST300CMD;Res;100850000;010;ReqIMSI;724031111553779

7-13. Requesting ICCID

Once this command is made, some interactions will be made between the server and the device as described in the
Meaning section of the table as below.
Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document
Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 126 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

Field Mark Value Meaning


CMD_ID ReqICCID How to request ICCID (Integrated Circuit Card Identifier), which
is a sequence number that is displayed on SIM.
If device receives this command, it sends the server ICCID.
<Example>

[command] ST300CMD;100850000;02;ReqICCID
[response] ST300CMD;Res;100850000;010;ReqICCID;89550230000084256668

7-14. Requesting to send information about Device Version

Once this command is made, some interactions will be made between the server and the device as described in the
Meaning section of the table as below.

Field Mark Value Meaning


CMD_ID ReqVer Requesting information about version of the device

If the device receives this command, it reports to the server


about:
Model,
Buyer,
Protocol, and
Software(S/W) release version.
<Example>

[command] ST300CMD;100850000;02;ReqVer
[response] ST300CMD;Res;100850000;010;ReqVer;ST300E_SAMPLE_STBASE_001

7-15.Status Request made by External Device Connected with RS232 of Event Lines

This command is made towards a device by the external device connected with RS232 of the event line. Once the
device receives this command, some interactions will be made between the external device and the device as
described in the Meaning section of the table as below.

HDR DEV_ID VER LEN DATA CHK_SUM

Field Mark Value Meaning


CMD_ID SttReq Status request.
If received, the device sends status string instantly.
<Example>

[command] SttReq
[response]
ST300STT;100850000;01;010;20090724;07:12:16;00129;+37.479995;+126.885815;000.029;000.00;
7;1;0;15.33;100000;2;0002

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 127 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

7-16. AT Commands from RS232

This command is made towards a device by the external device connected with RS232 of the event line. Once the
device receives this command, some interactions will be made between the external device and the device as
described in the Meaning section of the table as below.

HDR AT COMMAND CR/LF

Field Marks Value Meaning


HDR ATCMD Header.
AT COMMAND General AT Commands string.
CR/LF 0x0d0x0a Mark of End [Carriage Return \ Line Feed].
<Example>
[command]
ATCMD;AT+CGREG? CR/LF

[response]
+CGREG:0, 1
OK

<Note>
The device of Suntech can support the most of AT Commands except SMS commands.

7-17. How to start Counting of Odometer Pulse

Definition: How to start counting odometer pulse to set ODO_UNIT.

Field Marks Value Meaning


CMD_ID StartCountOdo Start counting odometer pulse.
<Example>
[command] ST300CMD;100850000;02;StartCountOdo
[response] ST300CMD;Res;100850000;267;StartCountOdo

<Note>
This command is used only on the model that has Odometer line (ST300H).

7-18. How to stop Counting of Odometer Pulse

Definition: End counting odometer pulse to calibrate.

Field Marks Value Meaning


CMD_ID StopCountOdo End counting odometer pulse.
Device responds with counted pulse no.
DIST meters Traveled distance.
<Example>
[command] ST300CMD;100850000;02;StopCountOdo=1500
1500 is traveled distance after StartCountOdo command.

[response] ST300CMD;Res;100850000;267;StopCountOdo;3300

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 128 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

Device calculates ODO_UNIT with count of odometer pulses and value of entered traveled distance
And responds with ODO_UNIT value (odometers pulse count per 1km distance).
3300 in the above example was calculated by 4950/1.5 (pulse count during the travel / travel
distance).

<Note>
Refer 9-10 for calibration by using this command.
This command is used only on the model that has Odometer line (ST300H).

7-19. Request information about RPM value

Definition: How to request to send information about RPM value

Field Marks Value Meaning


CMD_ID ReqRPMU Request RPM unit (pulse/second of 1000RPM).
<Example>
[command] ST300CMD;100850000;02;ReqRPMU
[response] In case that RPM_UNIT of telemetric setting parameter is set to A.
ST300CMD;Res;100850000;267;ReqRPMU;A (if not calibrated yet)
ST300CMD;Res;100850000;267;ReqRPMU;A;12500 (if calibrated)
In case that RPM_UNIT of telemetric setting parameter was set with value.
SA200CMD;Res; 100850000;267;ReqRPMU;12500

<Note>
This command is used only on the model that has RPM line (ST300H).

7-20. Request information about Odometer value

Definition: Request information about odometer value

Field Marks Value Meaning


CMD_ID ReqOdoU Request Odometer value (pulse per 1km).
<Example>
[command] ST300CMD;100850000;02;ReqOdoU

[response] In case that ODO_UNIT of telemetric setting parameter is set to A.


ST300CMD;Res;100850000;267;ReqOdoU;A (if not calibrated yet)
ST300CMD;Res;100850000;267;ReqOdoU;A;12500 (if calibrated)
ST300CMD;Res;100850000;267;ReqOdoU;A;12500;6250 (if calibrated with dual type)
In case that ODO_UNIT of telemetric setting parameter was set with value.
SA200CMD;Res;100850000;267;ReqOdoU;12500

<Note>
In case of big truck, the vehicle may have dual gear system and may be changed odometer unit (pulse per 1km
distance). When ODO_UNIT is set to auto, the device can recognize these dual situations automatically and
can apply different value depending on dual situations as calculating speed and moving distance.
This command is used only on the model that has RPM line (ST300H).

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 129 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

7-21. Request Driver ID

Definition: Request current inserted driver ID.

Field Marks Value Meaning


CMD_ID ReqDriverID Request inserted driver ID.
<example>
[command] ST300CMD;;02;ReqDriverID
[response]ST300CMD;Res;100850000;267;ReqDriverID;0100004E160000
SA200CMD;Res;100850000;267;NoDriverID

<note>
This command is used only on the model that has RPM line (ST300H).

7-22. Request to Release Output Control by Driver ID

Definition: Request all registered driver IDs.

Field Marks Value Meaning


CMD_ID ReleaseDIDOutControl Release output control by driver ID temporarily.
<Example>
[command] ST300CMD;;02;ReleaseDIDOutControl
[response]ST300CMD;Res;100850000;267;ReleaseDIDOutControl

<Note>
When the device activates related output because registered I-button is not inserted and the device receives this
command, the device deactivates related output temporarily until next parking.
This command is used only on the model that can support I-button (ST300A, ST300H, ST300K and ST300D).

7-23. Request information about telemetry setting parameter

Definition: Request telemetry setting parameter.

Field Marks Value Meaning


CMD_ID ReqTeleParam Request telemetric parameter.
<Example>
[command] ST300CMD;100850000;02; ReqTeleParam
[response]ST300CMD;Res;100850000;267;ReqTeleParam;1;1;A;A;3200;1500;4000;0;0100004E160000;;1;3;
1000;0;0

<Note>
This command works only on ST300H, ST300A and ST300K.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 130 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

8. COMMAND FOR VARIOUS USAGES

Description on each factor necessary to make types of these commands is shown in this Chapter.

HDR DEV_ID VER CMD_ID

Field Marks Value Meaning


HDR ST300CMD Command type.
DEV_ID 9 char Device ID.
VER 01 Protocol Version.
CMD_ID String Control command content.

Commands are classified into two groups such as:


Commands for General Use, which have already been explained in the previous chapter.
Commands for Non-general Use.

The latter commands are described here as below.

8-1. Command on how to erase all the saved reports Erase All

This command is used if you want to erase all the saved reports and disable the outputs.

Field Mark Value Meaning


CMD_ID EraseAll This command is used if you want to erase all the saved reports
and disable the outputs.
This command is needed to initialize the device which is to be
delivered to a new customer.
<Example>
[command] ST300CMD;100850000;02;EraseAll
[response] ST300CMD;Res;100850000;010;EraseAll

8-2. Command on how to set Traveled Distance

This command is used if you want to set the travelled distance.

Field Mark Value Meaning


CMD_ID SetOdometer= meter Setting odometer.
<Example>
[command] ST300CMD;100850000;02;SetOdometer=999999999
[response] ST300CMD;Res;100850000;010;SetOdometer=999999999

This command is used if you want to set the travelled distance to 0.

Field Mark Value Meaning


CMD_ID InitDist Initialize travelled distance.
<Example>
[command] ST300CMD;100850000;02;InitDist
[response] ST300CMD;Res;100850000;010;InitDist

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 131 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

8-3. Command on how to initialize Message Number

This command is used if you want to initialize sequence number of the message.

Field Mark Value Meaning


CMD_ID InitMsgNo Set message number to 0.
<Example>
[command] ST300CMD;100850000;02;InitMsgNo
[response] ST300CMD;Res;100850000;010;InitMsgNo

8-4. Command on how to set Hour-Meter

This command is used if you want to set the travelled time period.

Field Mark Value Meaning


CMD_ID SetHMeter= minute What to set the travelled time period.
<Example>
[command] ST300CMD;100850000;02;SetHMeter=999999
[response] ST300CMD;Res;100850000;010;SetHmeter=999999
Max value is 999999

8-5. Command on how to initialize Circular Geo-fence

This command is used for erasing all circular geo-fence setting data.

Field Mark Value Meaning


CMD_ID InitCircleGeo Erase all circular geo-fence data.
<Example>
[command] ST300CMD;100850000;02;InitCircleGeo
[response] ST300CMD;Res;100850000;010;InitCircleGeo

8-6. Command on how to request data relating to Circular Geo-fence

This command is used if the device is required to report to the server with all of the geo-fence parameters that are
pre-set.

Field Mark Value Meaning


CMD_ID ReqCircleGeo Report the enabled circular geo-fences.
Response consists of continuous field (0 or 1) and
information about all the geo-fences including the first
geo-fence up to the last one whose last digit is 1 (One).
<Example>
[command] ST300CMD;100850000;02;ReqCircleGeo
[response] Case that unit has 3 geo-fences :
ST300CMD;Res;100850000;010;ReqCircleGeo;1;1;1;+37.000000;+127.000000;2000;1;1
ST300CMD;Res;100850000;010;ReqCircleGeo;1;2;1;+37.100000;+127.100000;2000;1;0
ST300CMD;Res;100850000;010;ReqCircleGeo;0;3;1;+37.200000;+127.200000;2000;1;1

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 132 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

Case that unit has no geo-fence.


ST300CMD;Res;100850000;010;ReqCircleGeo;NoData

<Notes>
** Continuous field of the above response string represents bold.

8-7. Command on how to request its Own Phone Number

Once this command is made, some interactions will be made between the server and the device as described in the
Meaning section of the table as below.

Field Mark Value Meaning


CMD_ID ReqOwnNo Requesting own phone number.
<Example>
[command] ST300CMD;100850000;02;ReqOwnNo
[response] ST300CMD;Res;100850000;010;ReqOwnNo;82220275656

<Notes>
** When the device has no SIM or is under power-on process, the own phone number cannot be read.
The device reports with NotReady.
** If the own number field in SIM is empty, the device reports with NoData.

8-8. Command on how to set its Own Phone Number

Once this command is made, some interactions will be made between the server and the device as described in the
Meaning section of the table as below.

Field Mark Value Meaning


CMD_ID SetOwnNo This command is followed by = and own number.
<Example>
[command] ST300CMD;100850000;02;SetOwnNo=21140108
[response] ST300CMD;Res;100850000;010;SetOwnNo=21140108

<Notes>
** When the device has no SIM or is under power-on process, the own phone number cannot be set.
The device reports with NotReady.

8-9. Command on how to request information about Current Volume Level in Call

This command is used if the current volume level needs to be reported to the server.

Field Mark Value Meaning


CMD_ID ReqVol Request volume.
<Example>
[command] ST300CMD;100850000;02;ReqVol
[response] ST300CMD;Res;100850000;010;ReqVol;200

<Notes>
** Its available only for the model that can support voice call.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 133 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

8-10. Command on how to set Volume Level

This command is made to the device when the volume level for the phone call receiver needs to be set.

Field Mark Value Meaning


CMD_ID SetVol Set volume level in call.
It is followed by = and volume number
<Example>
[command] ST300CMD;100850000;02;SetVol=200
[response] ST300CMD;Res;100850000;010;SetVol=200

<Notes>
** It is available only for the model that can support voice call.
If the device supports Voice, volume number range must be 0 to 6.
If the device does not support Voice, volume number range must be 0 to 255.

8-11. Command on how to Reboot

This command is made by the server to the device which needs to be rebooted.

Field Mark Value Meaning


CMD_ID Reboot Reboot device.
<Example>
[command] ST300CMD;100850000;02;Reboot
[response] ST300CMD;Res;100850000;010;Reboot

8-12. Command on how to enable Server Locking

This command is made by the server to the device when the server wants to enable server locking.

Field Mark Value Meaning


HDR EnableSvrLock Enable Server Lock
<Example>
[command] ST300CMD;100850000;02;EnableSvrLock
[response] ST300CMD;Res;100850000;010;EnableSvrLock

<Note>
1. How to EnableSvrLock command is available only when this command is sent by GPRS.
2. Once Server Lock is Enabled and the first report is made to the server, the server starts being locked.
3. If Server is LOCKED, you can change IP and port (including backup server) only by GPRS.
The other parameters are configurable by SyncTrak or GPRS or SMS.
4. In order to Disable the Server Locking, you have to use PC program (ServerLock) with USB Dongle.

8-13. Command on How to Disable Server Locking

This command is made by the server to the device when the server wants to disable a function of server locking.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 134 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

Field Mark Value Meaning


HDR DisableSvrLock Disable Server Lock.
<Example>
[command] ST300CMD;100850000;02;DisableSvrLock
[response] ST300CMD;Res;100850000;010;DisableSvrLock

<Note>
1. DisableSvrLock command can be effective only when the command is sent by GPRS.
2. This command is used to disable the state of the server locking.

8-14. Command on How to Restart Anti-Theft 2

This command is made by the server to the device when the server wants to restart a function, Anti-theft 2.

Field Marks Value Meaning


CMD_ID RestartAntiTheft2 Restart anti-theft after making anti-theft disabled by pressing
the panic button in case of Anti-theft 2.
<Example>
[command] ST300CMD;100850000;02;RestartAntiTheft2
[response] ST300CMD;Res;100850000;010;RestartAntiTheft2

<Note>
This command is only for Anti-theft 2 mode.

8-15. Command on how to set SMS Number for Panic Situation

This table shows us how to set the SMS number to be used when the panic button is pressed.

Field Mark Value Meaning


CMD_ID SetSMSNoOfPanic How to set the SMS number where the location information
(i.e. the location link address) will be delivered through SMS
when the panic button is pressed.
<Example>
[command] ST300CMD;100850000;02;SetSMSNoOfPanic=01988888888
[response] ST300CMD;Res;100850000;010;SetSMSNoOfPanic=01988888888

8-16.Command on how to request SMS Number Used in Panic Situation

This table shows us how to get the SMS number when the panic button is pressed.

Field Mark Value Meaning


CMD_ID ReqSMSNoOfPanic Requesting SMS number where the location link address is
sent when the panic button is pressed.
<Example>
[command] ST300CMD;100850000;02;ReqSMSNoOfPanic
[response] ST300CMD;Res;100850000;010;ReqSMSNoOfPanic;NoData

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 135 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

8-17. Command on how to set Google Map Address

In a case that you use a smart phone operating a function of Where Are You, you can use the server of the Google
as set below in italic bold letters, Google map address. The users of the Google map should check what the right
map address of the Google is and that the right address should be set. The Google map address needs to be checked.
If the Google map address is not right, this function (Where Are You) cant be used.

Field Mark Value Meaning


CMD_ID SetGoogleMap Set location link address format (Google map address).
This command is either followed by = or inserted inside the
address.
<Example>
[command] ST300CMD;100850000;02;SetGoogleMap=http://maps.google.com/maps?q=
[response] ST300CMD;Res;100850000;010; SetGoogleMap=http://maps.google.com/maps?q=

[command] ST300CMD;100850000;02;SetGoogleMap=http://maps.google.com/[Lon],[Lat]/maps?q
[response] ST300CMD;Res;100850000;010; SetGoogleMap=http://maps.google.com/[Lon],[Lat]/maps?q

<Note>
The max of input string is 96 characters.

8-18. Command on how to get Google Map Address

In case this command is made, the pre-set existing Google Map address will be known.

Definition: Get Google Map Address.

Field Mark Value Meaning


CMD_ID ReqGoogleMap Request the Google Map Address.
This command is followed by = and Google Map Address.
<Example>
[command] ST300CMD;100850000;02;ReqGoogleMap
[response] ST300CMD;Res;100850000;010;ReqGoogleMap;http://maps.google.com/maps?q=

8-19. Command on how to do Simultaneous Testing for Output 1 & 2 for 30 seconds

The following tables show how to test the two outputs (i.e. Output1 and Output2) at the same time for 30 or 60
seconds.

Field Mark Value Meaning


CMD_ID ReqShortTest Request the device to activate all outputs to do testing at the
same time for 30seconds.
<example>
[command] ST300CMD;100850000;02;ReqShortTest
[response] ST300CMD;Res;100850000;259;ReqShortTest

Output 1 and Output 2 will be activated for 30 seconds for the testing. In 30 seconds, the two outputs will be
deactivated.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 136 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

Field Mark Value Meaning


CMD_ID ReqTest Request the device to activate all outputs to do testing at the
same time for 60seconds.
<Example>
[command] ST300CMD;100850000;02;ReqTest
[response] ST300CMD;Res;100850000;259;ReqTest

Output 1 and Output 2 will be activated for 60 seconds for the testing. In 60 seconds, the two outputs will be
deactivated.

8-20. Command on how to Improve Battery Life

For the purpose of reducing power consumption of the battery while the main power line is disconnected (only
backup battery sources power), the server can make this command.

Field Mark Value Meaning


CMD_ID ImproveBatteryLife 0 or 1 0 : Maintain status of activated GPS chip only in
movement state.

1 : Turn off GPS chip after acquiring GPS information


at a pre-defined interval in parking mode or in
drivng mode , which is described in the chapter of this
document,
<Example>
[command] ST300CMD;100850000;02;ImproveBatteryLife=1
[response] ST300CMD;Res;100850000;259;ImproveBatteryLife=1

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 137 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

8-21. Request information about the Temperature Sensor ID

Once this command is made, some interactions will be made between the server and the device as described in
the Meaning section of the table as below.

Field Mark Value Meaning


CMD_ID ReqTempSensorId Requesting information about Temperature Sensor ID on the
device

If the device receives this command, it reports to the server


about:
Current Temperature Sensor IDs
<Example>
[command] ST300CMD;100850000;02;ReqTempSensorId
CASE 1 : 1 Sensor
[response] ST300CMD;Res;600850779;554;ReqTempSensorId;28E4D95F060000D5;28F5573B050000AA
CASE 2 : 2 Sensors
[response] ST300CMD;Res;600850779;554;ReqTempSensorId;28E4D95F060000D5;28F5573B050000AA
CASE 3 : 3 Sensors
[response] ST300CMD;Res;600850779;554;ReqTempSensorId;28E4D95F060000D5;28F5573B050000AA;
28F0573B050000CC

8-22. Request information about the Temperature


Once this command is made, some interactions will be made between the server and the device as described in
the Meaning section of the table as below.

Field Mark Value Meaning


CMD_ID ReqTemperature Requesting information about temperature of the sensor

If the device receives this command, it reports to the server


about:
Current temperature
<Example>
[command] ST300CMD;100850000;02;ReqTemperature
CASE 1 : 1 Sensor
[response]
ST300CMD;Res;600850779;554;ReqTemperature;28E4D95F060000D5:+23.2;:;:
CASE 2 : 2 Sensors
[response]
ST300CMD;Res;600850779;554;ReqTemperature;28E4D95F060000D5:+23.2;28F5573B050000AA:+1.5;:
CASE 3 : 3 Sensors
ST300CMD;Res;600850779;554;ReqTemperature;28E4D95F060000D5:+23.2;28F5573B050000AA:+1.5;28F
0573B050000CC:+12.5

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 138 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

8-23. Command on how to set MIC Volume Level

This command is made to the device when the volume level for the phone call receiver needs to be set.

Field Mark Value Meaning


CMD_ID SetMicVol Set MIC volume level in call.
It is followed by = and volume number (0~255)
<Example>
[command] ST300CMD;100850000;02;SetMicVol=200
[response] ST300CMD;Res;100850000;010;SetMicVol=200

<Notes>
** It is available only for the model that can support voice call.

8-24. Command on how to set Horn Pulses.

This command will be setting Horn Pulses count or reset the output type to GPIO.

Field Mark Value Meaning


CMD_ID HornPulses 1 to 5 Set Horn Pulses count. Details in notes.
<Example>
[command] ST300CMD;205123123;02;HornPulses=1
[response] ST300CMD;Res; 205123123;620;HornPulses=1

<Notes>
Value Activating Time Deactivating Time Pulse count Output2 type
1 2 seconds 2 seconds 1 Horn Pulses
2 2 seconds 2 seconds 2 Horn Pulses
3 2 seconds 2 seconds 3 Horn Pulses
4 2 seconds 2 seconds 4 Horn Pulses
5 n/a n/a n/a GPIO

8-25. Command on how to initialize Over Speed Time.

This command will be setting Horn Pulses count or reset the output type to GPIO.

Field Mark Value Meaning


CMD_ID InitOverSp Set Over Speed Time to 0.
<Example>
[command] AT^ST300CMD;205989898;02;InitOverSp
[response] ST300CMD;Res;205989898;630;InitOverSp

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 139 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

9. DETAILED DESCRIPTION ON EVENT LINES AND FEATURES

9-1. Total 14-pin Event Lines

Device has 14-pin event lines consisting of a port with 4-pin lines (to be described later) and another port with10-pin
cables as shown in the below picture to be used for events, communication, power and ground line.

10-pin Event lines


Red pin 1 Car battery (Main power 8V ~ 40V) FIX wire
ORG pin 2 Output 1 FIX wire
BRWN pin 3 Output 2 FIX wire
YELL pin 4 Input 2 (option ; i-Button) option
GRN pin 5 Input 3 (Option = ADC) option
BLUE pin 6 Ignition FIX wire
BLK pin 7 Ground FIX wire
GRAY pin 8 Input 4 option
PURP pin 9 Input 5 option
WHT pin 10 Input 1 FIX wire

The Input lines were designed to endure up to 50V. The output lines can endure up to 40V.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 140 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

4-pin Event line


WHT pin 1 RS232_DRX ( option; Audio_mic) option
GRN pin 2 RS232_DTX (option; Audio_speaker) option
BRN pin 3 Power for external (DC4.9V or 12V) option
BLK pin 4 Ground FIX wire

Option1 and Option2 lines can be selected out of the types (which are shown in the Figure above) by changing the
circuit of the connection made in the factory.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 141 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

Event line table varies depending on model variation of ST300 Series:

Pin No. ST300A ST300H ST300V ST300R ST300C


Main Main Main
1 Main Power Main Power
Power Power Power
2 Output 1 Output 1 Output 1 Output 1 Output 1
3 Output 2 Output 2 Output 2 Output 2 Output 2
4 I-BTN/Temp I-button Input2 Input2 Input 2
5 Input 3/ADC Input 3 Input3/ADC Input3/ADC Input3/ADC
6 Ignition Ignition Ignition Ignition Ignition
7 Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground
8 ADC1 (5V) RPM Input 4 RS232 TX CAN_H
9 ADC2 (5V) Odometer Output 4 RS232 RX CAN_L
10 Input 1 Input 1 Input 1 Input 1 Input 1

External External RS232_RX


1 RS232_Rx RS232_Rx
MIC MIC
2 RS232_Tx RS232_Tx Speaker R Speaker R RS232_TX
External Vehicle NC
3 Speaker L Speaker L
3.3V Power
4 Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground

ST300K ST300P ST300F ST340LC ST340 ST300D


Main Main Main
Main Power Main Power Main Power
Power Power Power
Output 1 Output 1 Output 1 Output 1 Output 1 Output 1
Output 2 Output 2 Output 2 Output 2 Output 2
I-
TPS1_IN Input 2 Input 2 I-button
BTN/Temp
Input 3 Input 3 Input 3
TPS1_OUT Input 3
/ADC /ADC /ADC
Ignition Ignition Ignition Ignition Ignition
Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground
CAN_H TPS2_IN RS232 TX
RS232 TX
(FUEL1)
CAN_L TPS2_OUT RS232 RX
RS232 RX
(FUEL1)
Input 1 Input 1 Input 1 Input 1 Input 1 Input 1

RS232_RX RS232_RX RS232_RX External


(FUEL2) MIC
RS232_TX RS232_TX RS232_TX
Speaker R
(FUEL2)
External 5V Vehicle Vehicle
Speaker L
Power Power

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 142 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

Ground Ground Ground Ground

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 143 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

ST340R
Main Power
GND
Ignition
Input 1
Input2
RS232_RX
Output1
RS_232_TX

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 144 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

9-1-1. Immobilizer

If output type is set to Immobilizer or Immobilizer & Auto Active and you connect this line to immobilize the vehicle,
the Output line can use the immobilizer.

When the device receives command to activate the immobilizer output, one of the 2 options (ActiveorInactive) will
be selected. Which activation you choose will depend on what mode the vehicle is in a parking mode or in a driving
mode.

In case of driving, the immobilizer activation is made in a way of progressive blocking as shown the following blinking
diagram:

The active time of the immobilizer is increased by 90ms each 4s.


Three (3)minutes later, the immobilizer starts being activated and will be activated continuously.

However, in case of parking, as soon as the vehicle is parked, the immobilizer is activated normally.

In a case that the Output type is set to Immobilizer & Auto active, the output is activated automatically as long as
the vehicle is parked. In such a case the Output is also activated as long as the vehicle starts being in a driving mode.

If the device receives a command to activate the immobilizer output, the output is always activated regardless to a
mode type (either parking mode or driving mode).

9-1-2. Immobilizer2
If output type is set to Immobilizer2(or Immobilizer2 & Auto Active), the way how Immobilizer2(or Immobilizer2 &
Auto Active) functions is same as the way how 9-1-1. Immobilizer functions.

The active time of the Immobilizer2(or Immobilizer2 & Auto Active) is increased by 90ms every 2.5 seconds.

One(1) minute later, the immobilizer starts being activated and will be activated continuously.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 145 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

9-1-3. Alert of Buzzer

In a case that the Output type is set to Buzzer, the buzzer alerts. The following table shows such cases:

9-1-3-1. Voice Model


Condition Alert Pulse Meaning
Incoming Call When the call is coming.

Outgoing Call When an outgoing call fails.


Error

9-1-3-2. Related with over-speed


Condition Alert Pulse Meaning
Over-speed When vehicles speed
(Out = Buzzer) exceeds the over-speed
value.
Over-speed When vehicles speed
(Out = exceeds the over-peed
NRT_Buzzer) value.
Stop buzzer When the vehicles speed
is maintained under (over-
speed value 5km/h) for
10 seconds.

9-1-3-3. Related with Anti-theft


In case one of any input ports is set to Anti-Theft.
Condition Alert Pulse Meaning
Enable This size of Alert pulse is
generated if you enable this
function by pressing the
anti-theft button for 10
seconds.
Disable This type of Alert pulse is
generated if you disable
this function by pressing
anti-theft button for 10
seconds.
Lock Alert When it starts to be in a
locking mode. Anti-theft
function is enabled and 20
seconds later after
beginning to park vehicle.
Emergency

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 146 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

9-2. Indication with Two (2) LEDs

RED LED indicates GPS status and blue LED indicates GPRS status while the device is not processing call.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 147 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

9-2-1. Red LED for GPS

GPS Blink Count Meaning


Normal 1

No Fix 2

<Probable Situations>

1. If power is on, GPS chipset tries to find position for some minutes.

2. If device has weak connectivity with GPS network or if it has no GPS


signal position.

3. If GPS connectivity with a device is weak.


GPS Chipset Error 4
GPS Antenna Error
<Probable Situations>
1. If GPS antenna is disconnected.
2. If GPS antenna or socket of GPS antenna is broken.
3. If device is broken.

9-2-2. Blue LED for GPRS

GPRS Blink Count Meaning


Normal 1

Server Com. Error 2

< Probable Situations >


1. If the server or network parameter is wrong.
2. If the server is closed.
3. If there is a temporary network barrier.
GPRS Com. Error 3

<Probable Situations >


1. If network parameter is wrong.
2. If SIM is blocked and it is impossible to use GPRS session.
3. If there is a temporary network barrier.
4. If device receives weak GPRS signal.
5. If GPRS connectivity with a device is weak.
No Network 4

< Probable Causes>


1. If GPRS antenna is disconnected.
2. If GPRS antenna or socket of GPRS antenna is broken.
3. If the device is broken.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 148 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

SIM PIN Locked 5

<Probable Situation >


1. If SIM PIN is enabled.
Cannot Attach NW 6

< Probable Situations>


1. If device receives weak GPRS signal.
2. If GPRS connectivity with a device is weak.
No SIM 7

< Probable Situations >


1. If there is no SIM or if SIM is not inserted properly.
2. If SIM or SIM socket is broken.

9-2-3. Phone Call LEDs

- Incoming Phone Call

Blue LED

Red LED

- While Talking over Phone Call

Blue LED

Red LED

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 149 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

9-3. Power Saving

The device can save power consumption of the battery by using one of two modes such as Sleep Mode or Deep
Sleep Mode. If PWR_DN is set with 1 or 2 and report interval in parking mode is made every 10 minutes or longer
than 10 minutes to enable the devices to process power down while the vehicle is in parking situation.

However, there are some restrictions in processing power down:

- If an emergency situation occurs, device cannot process power down for 30 minutes due to safety issue.
- When GPS signal is not fixed, the device can start to process power down after trying to fix for 5 minutes.
- If communication with the server fails continuously, the device processes Deep Sleep after trying to make
communications for 8 minutes.
- While the device is in deep sleep, it cannot process charging the backup battery.

Device turns off LED and sends a status report and a related alert before entering the power-down functionality.

The device terminates power down either when ignition is ON or when an event or an emergency occurs. In such
cases, the device sends related alert and status string, instead.

- Sleep

Device turns off only GPS part and GPRS part enters Sleep. Even for time of Sleep, all communication with the
server works normally and the device can receive SMS or call always. Average of Sleep current is lower than 10mA
and this current may be increased under weak GPRS condition.

- Deep Sleep

Device turns off GPS and GPRS part. For the time of Sleep, all communication with the server is impossible and it
cannot receive any SMS messages or any calls, either. Device turns on GPRS session every max. 30 minutes.
However, the device cannot receive SMS or call while it is in Deep Sleep. Average current during Deep Sleep mode
is around 5mA (non-battery version).

9-4.Backup Battery

The device has a backup battery in order to be prepared for any emergency cases when the main power source is
removed or sabotaged. When the vehicle is stolen and power of device is removed, the backup battery starts working
as a replacement power source for the main power source (the vehicles battery).

Backup battery at full charge on good GPRS network condition at a reporting interval value of every 3 minutes, the
device can work for 6 hours or more at least.

The device was designed to keep backup battery staying as effective as possible all the time. Charging the backup
battery starts if voltage of the backup battery goes below 4,2V.In a parking mode, charging the backup battery is hold
when the main power source gets consumed down to 90% of the normal voltage level.

The charging algorithm for the backup battery has a protection against over-voltage, abnormal charging current and
high temperature.

In addition, the device alerts about battery error if the backup battery cannot be charged.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 150 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

9-5. Motion Sensor

<About How to activate Motion Sensor>

- Ignition ON (Driving)

The sensor mode goes to collision detection mode. So, if the vehicle has a car accident, the accident may bring about
a big impact of which value is higher than that of the specified collision threshold (COLL_THRES). In this case the
device will be reporting a collision message to the server.

After a collision is made against the vehicle, the sensor will be disabled for a while (30 seconds) so as to avoid
sending to the server the same message as the first one repeatedly.

- Ignition OFF (Parking)

Ignition Off situation means that the vehicle is in state of parking and that the sensor goes to parking mode(shock
or movement detection mode).

In this situation, if there is a shock made on the vehicle by somebody, the device will report a shock message to the
server. The device will also exit from the power down mode if the device has been in power down mode.

In case of movement, the device will exit from the mode of power down to check functionality of Parking Lock without
reporting to the server.

After triggering an event such as a shock or a movement, the sensor will be disabled for a while (for 30 seconds) so
as to avoid sending to the server the same message as the first one repeatedly.

<About Threshold>

- Collision Threshold

Our recommendation is 0.7 but it is only for reference value obtained from our field testing made on real vehicles
(nearby gear).The value may vary in a real situation depending upon driving manner or condition of road. So, you
need to check this value.

- Shock Threshold

Our recommendation is 0.04 but it is only for reference value obtained from our field testing made on real vehicles
(nearby gear).Motion sensor is installed on an inside part of the vehicles body to measure sensitivity value(s) created
by vibration and shock impact given to the vehicle. Value of this sensitivity varies because it depends on what body
part of the vehicle the motion sensor is installed.

Shock Threshold is also used for checking movement of vehicle. So, the device may not be able to recognize if a
shock threshold value is too high. You need to consider these kinds of factors measurable under realistic environment
when you also adjust the values.

State Detection Exit from Power down Reporting about:


Motion Shock Collision Motion Shock Collision Motion Shock Collision
Parking ON Enable X Exit Exit Exit X Enable X
Driving OFF OFF Enable X X X X X Enable
Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document
Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 151 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

<Notes>
ON: Activation.
OFF: Deactivation.
Enable: Enable or Disable by setting.
X:Please, do not care.

For setting method, please refer to Motion Sensor Parameter Settings.

[Caution]:Basically, the device checks any motions in parking mode(Ignition Off). It does not care about the enable
flags such as COLL_EN or SHOCK_EN. This means that, if the device senses any motion (movement) created in
the power down mode, it will exit from the power down mode as if a creature would wake up from sleeping suddenly.
So, if you want to check the power down mode to save power consumption of the backup battery, DO NOT give any
impacts to the vehicle.

9-6. Protection of Vehicle Battery

For a period of duration that the vehicle has been in a parking mode for a long time by consuming vehicles battery
down to a very low level, the device starts entering the Deep Sleep Mode automatically. This situation happens
because the device intends to prevent vehicles battery from wasting power. In this case, the device alerts with
ALERT_ID 14 before entering the deep sleep mode, and exits from the deep sleep mode either when ignition line
goes to ON or until the voltage level is increased sufficiently.

The vehicles battery level for protection can be changed by making a Command. Refer to Voltage control parameters
section.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 152 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

9-7. Route Deviation

Route deviation is a function to track travelling route of the vehicle with the predefined route. It is useful for the
company to instruct the driver to drive the vehicle along a safe road or without getting out of the safe road(s). The
following picture shows you an example of the predefined route.

[Sample Route]

<How to set the route>

Setting Route

For above sample route, setting commands are as below.

ST300STR;xxxxxxxxx;02;1;Latitude of POS1;Longitude of POS1;GAP1;Latitude of POS2;Longitude of


POS2;GAP2;
Latitude of POS3;Longitude of POS3;GAP3;Latitude of POS4;Longitude of POS4;GAP4;Latitude of POS5;Logitude
of POS5;0

If number of positions exceeds 10 points, the command should be divided with 10 points as follows:

ST300STR;xxxxxxxxx;02;1;Latitude of POS1;Longitude of POS2;GAP1;..;Latitude of POS10;Longitude of


POS10;GAP10
ST300STR;xxxxxxxxx;02;11;Latitude of POS11;Longitude of POS11;GAP11;.

The last field of Gap should be 0. Our device provides many positions up to 500.

How to start checking the route

The following command should be sent to start checking the route:

ST300CTR;xxxxxxxxx;02;1

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 153 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

<How to operate Route Deviation function>

If Route deviation is enabled, the device checks whether or not the vehicle is moving along the predefined route.
A sample shown hereunder shows you that the device is able to check if the vehicle is moving along the predefine
route as long as the vehicle in on motion is inside the gray-colored boundary.

When the vehicle gets out of the route or re-enters the route, the device alerts with Alert ID 18 and Alert ID 19 to the
server.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 154 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

9-8. Anti-Theft

Anti-theft function available at the device is used to protect the vehicle from a risk of potential thefts by utilizing buzzer,
immobilizer and alerting to the server.

In order to use the function related with the anti-theft, the following basic conditions should be satisfied:

[Basic Conditions]

1. IGNITION of event parameter should not be set to 0 (No Use).


2. One input should be set to Anti-theft or Anti-theft 2 button type.

If one output event is set to immobilizer or buzzer, immobilizer or buzzer can be activated automatically when
emergency related with anti-theft occurs.

Activation/Deactivation

When the input is set to Anti-theft by command, anti-theft is enabled by default at first.
Activation/deactivation state of anti-theft can be checked by PresetA command.

Case of Anti-Theft

In a case that anti-theft button type is Anti-theft and that the device has a buzzer, the anti-theft function can be
activated or deactivated by pressing anti-theft button for more than 10seconds.If anti-theft button is pressed for 10
seconds in activation mode of anti-theft, anti-theft gets disabled by making the buzzer beep two times.

On the other hand, if anti-theft button is pressed as being disabled, anti-theft gets enabled by making the buzzer
beep just one time.

Case of Anti-Theft 2

In case that anti-theft button is set to Anti-theft2, anti-theft activation/deactivation cannot be changed by pressing
the anti-theft button. In that case, the anti-theft is always activated.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 155 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

Anti-theft without Door Sensor

The anti-theft system in a vehicle without door sensor can be operated. The followings show you how it works:

1. About when the anti-theft system starts working? There are 2 different types of the start timing of the anti-theft
function as described below:

1.1 If your device (ST300) has been configured with the Anti-theft button, twenty (20) seconds later after the
vehicle is parked (ignition goes to off), the protection function starts working by making a beep just one
time.

1.2 If your device (ST300) has been configured with the Anti-theft2 button, twenty (20) seconds later after
the vehicle is parked (ignition goes to off), the protection function starts working silently.

2. After driving is started (ignition goes to on) in state of vehicle protection, the driver should press the anti-theft
button within the predefined time period of Delay of Anti-theft Release described in the New Parameter.

3. If the button is pressed for 1 second within this time period, the protection function is released. If the driver has
not pressed the button within this time period, anti-theft emergency of the device starts working immediately.

4. In emergency, the buzzer and the immobilizer are activated if they are connected properly. After the preset time
of Delay of Anti-Theft Alert, the device sends emergency report about anti-theft occurring.

5. However, you can stop such an emergency functioning of the device if you were not expecting such an
emergency. The followings are two (2) alternatives on how to stop functioning the Emergency:

Alt. 1. By pressing Anti-theft button for 1 second, the emergency situation can be stopped immediately.

Alt. 2. As soon as all the immobilizer and the buzzer start getting deactivated by commands of the Disable
Output, the emergency situation will be over.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 156 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

Anti-Theft with Door Sensor

The anti-theft system in a vehicle having door sensor can be operated. The followings show you how it works:

1. About when the anti-theft system starts working? There are 2 different types of the start timing of the anti-theft
function as described below:

1.1 Under an assumption that your device (ST300) has been configured with the Anti-theft button, twenty
(20) seconds later after the driver parks the vehicle (ignition goes to off), opens and closes the door, the
protection function starts working by making a beep just one time.

1.2 Under an assumption that your device (ST300) has been configured with the Anti-theft2button, twenty
(20) seconds later after the driver parks the vehicle (ignition goes to off), opens and closes the door, the
protection function starts working silently.

2. After the door is opened and closed in state of vehicle protection, the driver should press the Anti-theft button
within the predefined time period of Delay of Anti-theft Release described in the New Parameter.

3. If the button is pressed for 1 second within this time period, the protection function is released. If the driver has
not pressed the button within this time period, anti-theft emergency of the device starts working immediately.

4. In emergency, the buzzer and the immobilizer are activated if they are connected properly. After the preset time
of Delay of Anti-Theft Alert, the device sends emergency report about anti-theft occurring.

5. However, you can stop such an emergency functioning of the device if you were not expecting such an
emergency. The followings are two (2) alternatives on how to stop functioning the Emergency:

Alt. 1. By pressing Anti-theft button for 1 second, the emergency situation can be stopped immediately.

Alt. 2. As soon as all the immobilizer and the buzzer start getting deactivated by commands of the Disable
Output, the emergency situation will be over.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 157 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

Door Protection

Door protection is operated if one (1) input is set to Door Sensor. This function is necessary to protect the vehicle
from unsafe occurrence events such as door-opening while driving the vehicle.

If the ignition goes to on in a situation of having a door opened, the device beeps two times just for notice. Once this
situation occurs, the driver should close the door and press the anti-theft button for 1 second within the predefined
time period, Delay of Anti-Theft Release of the New Parameter.

Otherwise, door sensor emergency of the device will start working and the buzzer and the immobilizer will be
activated.

If there is no pressing the Anti-theft button for the time period of Delay of Anti-theft Report, the device starts
sending to the server the report about the door sensor emergency.

By pressing Anti-theft button shortly (for 1 second), the emergency can be stopped and the immobilizer and the
buzzer can be deactivated.

Shock on Anti-theft Protection

Shock checking can be supported when the following conditions are satisfied:

1. One input should be set to Anti-theft2.


2. M_SENSOR of the service parameter should be set to use shock.

In case that protection against anti-theft starts (with/without door sensor) and that the period of shock delay time
has passed, the shock protection starts working as well.

In a situation of the shock protection, if a shock is checked, the device activates the immobilizer and the buzzer if
they are connected properly. In such a situation, the device will also send the related emergency report to the server.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 158 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

By pressing the anti-theft button shortly (for 1 second), the emergency situation can be stopped and the immobilizer
and the buzzer can be deactivated.

Temporary deactivation made by Panic

This function is supported if you select Anti-theft2 in configuring the device.

If the panic button is pressed, the anti-theft is deactivated temporarily to protect the driver from robbery in a dangerous
situation. Once the anti-theft is deactivated, the anti-theft can be activated only by making a command named
RestartAntiTheft2.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 159 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

9-9. Storage of Reports un-sent

Device has maximum storage capacity of the un-sent reports in such cases as follows:

2,000 status reports (**),

50 emergency reports,

50 alert reports (including event reports), and

1500 bytes for the response that the command has required the device to respond with as command
response

Note (**):

Due to bad report-routing environment, device could not make a real-time based reporting. For example,
the reporting router does neither run properly, is nor connected properly. In such a situation there might be
a report which has consequently failed to arrive in the server successfully after making several attempts to
send the report to the server. In that case, the device stores such a report for a while until such environment
(e.g. GPRS network) gets back to normal to enable the device to try to send the report to the server again.

When status reports start being accumulated, max 2000 reports can be hold in the buffer storage of the
device. If those status reports are triggered out to the server, the oldest report is erased first and a new
report is buffered if the buffer is completely full of those reports. And then, a new status report enters (FIFO:
First In First Out as a sequential system).

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 160 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

9-10. Odometer and RPM Calibration

RPM Calibration

This is the steps to calibrate RPM.

1. Turn ON and turn OFF ignition line (blue line)9 times continuously.
On(1st) Off(2nd) ON(3rd) Off(4th) ON(5th) Off(6th) On(7th) Off(8th) On(9th)
2. Wait during 5 seconds.
3. And GPRS LED (blue) blinks 0.5s continuously and GPS LED (red) is turned off.
4. Press accelerator keeping 2000RPM for 10seconds. It should be progressed within 3minutes.
5. As calibration is completed successfully, the GPRS LED illuminates. The LEDs return to normal mode after
turn off and on again. In case of fail, the device blinks the LED with normal method and Installer should
repeat calibration process from 1ststep.

Odometer Calibration

There are two ways to calibrate odometer automatically, by ignition line and by commands. Each calibration follows
below steps.
Calibration by ignition:
1. Wait until GPS is fixed (GPS LED (red) blinks one time).
1. Turn ON and turn OFF the blue line (ignition line)5 times continuously.
On(1st) Off(2nd) On(3rd) Off(4th) On(5th).
2. Wait during 5 seconds.
3. And, GPS LED (red) blinks 0.5s continuously and GPRS LED (blue) is turned off. If GPS has no enough
good condition, LEDs blinks with normal method.
4. Drive more than 1 km.
5. When the calibration is completed successfully, the GPS LED illuminates continuously. The LEDs return
normal way after turn off and on again. In case of fail after driving, the device blinks the LEDs normally and
installer should repeat calibration process from 1st step.

Calibration by commands:

1. Send StartCountOdo command.


2. Then, if the driver drives, the device counts odometer pulses number.
3. Send StopCountOdo Command with traveled distance.
4. The device calculates odometer unit with counted pulses number and traveled distance.
It recommends the driver drives more than 1km for precise calibration.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 161 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

9-11. I-button

The ST300H, the ST300A and the ST300K support reading I-button and supply related functions.

I-button looks like a coin and has a unique ID, 14 hex digits.

Once the device recognizes the I-button, this ID of the button is valid until the vehicle changes from driving to parking
although the I-button is removed. So, until the next parking, the device keeps reporting with this ID information and
approval of this ID from registration table forbids activation by driver ID.
.

Lets take two examples:

Case 1)
1. When a registered I-button is inserted in parking mode, the buzzer beeps once (if buzzer is connected) and the
device sends alert (ID=59).
2. I-button is removed and the device sends alert (ID=60).
3. Device reports with the previous I-buttons ID, which is still valid.
4. Even if the vehicle turns into a driving mode, the output relating to the driver ID is not activated. Even though
the registered I-button is not inserted, the previous I-buttons ID is still valid.
5. As soon as the vehicle goes to a parking mode, the ID is removed.

Case 2)
1. When unregistered I-button is inserted in parking mode, the buzzer beeps once (if buzzer is connected) and the
device sends alert (ID=59).
2. The vehicle turns to driving, and the device activates the related output because the previous driver ID is not
available in the registration table.
3. The vehicle turns to parking, and the device releases the related output.
4. When the I-button is removed, the device sends alert (ID=60) and the ID field in the report is removed.

Also, the device uses this I-button ID as driver ID.

Driver ID can be registered up to 100 in the device. There are 2 methods for registration. One is done by command
and the other is done by the master I-button.

By utilizing I-button, the procedure on how to register Driver ID is taken by step-by-step instruction as follows:

Step 1. Please insert and remove the Master I-button (by adding the master / by removing the master).
Step 2. Please insert a new I-button within 10 seconds after removing it.
Step 3. Upon completing the procedure for the Step 1 and Step 2, the ID of I-button is registered or
deregistered automatically.

When a device with registered I-button is set to control immobilizer of a vehicle, only the drivers whose IDs have
been registered are allowed to drive the vehicle. If other drivers drive the vehicle, the device will activate the
immobilizer and the vehicle cannot be driven by those people. .

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 162 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

9-12. Fuel Sensor

The ST300F supports reading fuel sensor data via RS232.

After the power of fuel sensor has been turned on, the sensor outputs the first RS232 data elapsed after 50
seconds. After the first data is output, the sensor outputs RS232 data every 10 seconds. (The sensor sample is
fixed to this condition by sensor firmware. It is a special feature of ESMUS01.)

Active time from wakeup to timing of RS232 data output: 60 seconds


Time length of Power down: 120 seconds

[RS232 Cable Connection]


For a description of the cable connections, refer to 9-1. Total 14-pin Event Lines.

UART lines of 10-pin cable are connected to the fuel sensor 1.


ST300F 10-pin event lines Fuel Sensor 1
Color Pin No. Description Line Color Description
BLACK pin 7 Ground BLACK Ground
GRAY pin 8 Sub UART Tx BLUE Sensor Rx
PURPLE pin 9 Sub UART Rx YELLOW Sensor Tx

UART lines of 4-pin cable are connected to the fuel sensor 2.


ST300F 4-pin event lines Fuel Sensor 2
Color Pin No. Description Line Color Description
WHITE pin 1 UART Rx YELLOW Sensor Tx
GREEN pin 2 UART Tx BLUE Sensor Rx
BLACK pin 4 Ground BLACK Ground

Thin Black line is for RS232 ground.


Bold Black line is for Power ground (connected to OUTPUT2).

[Power Lines Connection]


ST300F uses OUTPUT2 line for power control of fuel sensors.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 163 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

[Alert Level]
If the ST300F detects rapid fuel level reduction from any of the fuel sensors, the ST300F makes an alert report.
The alert ID is 73.

If the ST300F detects rapid fuel level increased from any of the fuel sensors, the ST300F makes an alert report.
This alert ID is 80, and this application can use when you use Omnicomm fuel sensors.

9-12-1. Omnicomm Fuel Sensor


If you use Omnicomm fuel sensor, you will have to set to like below:
1. Baud rate: 9600bps
2. Default data output mode: Binary data output

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 164 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

9-13. Temperature sensor


The ST300A and ST300K supports reading temperature sensor data via 1-Wire.

This 1-Wire Temperature Sensor use Maxim DS18B20 digital thermometer solution, which is designed to
monitor the temperature of Refrigerator or Refrigerator car.

9-13-1. Product Specification


The DS18B20 has an operating temperature range of -55 to +125 and is accurate to +-0.5 over the
range of -10 to +85.

. Maximum 3 temperature sensor support (8000mm*3)


. Measures temperatures from -55 to +125.
.+- 0.5 accuracy from -10 ~ +85 Celsius

9-13-2. Product Outside Overview

9-13-3. Product Installation

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 165 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

10.Appendices
10-1. How to convert the TEMPERATURE DATA(ZIP DATA) to the Celsius value.

If you use the ZIP option, you will be received data which is zipped like below.

Each TempSensor has the 2bytes.

To get the Celsius, please use below code.

<CODE>
float _celsius_temperature(unsigned short temperature)
{
unsigned short measure;
unsigned char negative;
unsigned char digit;
unsigned short decimal;
float fResult;

measure = temperature;

// check for negative


if ( measure & 0x8000 ) {
negative = 1; // mark negative
measure ^= 0xffff; // convert to positive => (twos complement)++
measure++;
}
else {
negative = 0;
}

digit = (measure>>4);
//Store decimal digits
decimal=measure&0xf;
decimal*= 625;
//range -55 ~ +125
if(negative==0)
{
fResult = digit + ((float)decimal/(float)10000.0);
}
else
{
fResult = digit + ((float)decimal/(float)10000.0);
fResult *= -1;
}
return fResult;
}

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 166 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

Ex) If the TEMPERATURE value is 01B4 then the Celsius is 27.25.

CELSIUS = _celsius_temperature(0x01B4);
CELSIUS = 27.25

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 167 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

REVISIONS
Rev. No. Date Modifications were made on: Writer
Rev. 1.00 2012-12-05 Construct Protocol. Ronaldo
Rev. 1.01 2012-12-13 Changed Motion Setting, Main Voltage Setting Command. KJH
Rev. 1.02 2012-12-17 General review and changed some details. Ronaldo
Rev. 1.00 2013-01-18 Create ST215 Standard spec. HG.Park
Rev. 1.01 2013-02-13 Add comment: alert 40,41,44,45 are optional. HG.Park
Rev. 1.02 2013-04-02 SW Version allocation byte changed from 1byte to 2bytes in case of Zip packet. SE.Park
Rev. 1.03 2013-04-17 Add missed tracking function description from old spec. HG.Park
Rev. 1.04 2013-05-23 Remove profile ID in tracking function. Its customized option. HG.Park
Rev. 1.05 2013-06-10 Add Hands-free kit options. SE.Park
Rev. 1.06 2013-06-25 Review whole the document. DY Jeong
Rev. 1.20 2014-01-25 ST300 : Replace whole document Which was proofread by Mr.Lee HG.Park
Ref. OperationDescription_ST215_ST240_STADV_SUNTECHBR_V112.odf
Rev. 1.22 2014-01-27 Change Event pin configure / add MODEL field in SMS report format. HG.Park
Modify anti-theft description / Proofreading. Sam.Lee
Rev. 1.23 2014-02-03 Clear Errata. HG.Park
Rev. 1.24 2014-02-04 Remove HBM_STT field in New Parameter Setting. Requested by SB. HG.Park
Rev. 1.25 2014-02-20 Include ignition in IN1_TYPE. Ronaldo
Rev. 1.26 2014-02-21 Include Protocol Setting. Ronaldo
Rev. 1.27 2014-02-26 Rearrange about protocol setting & satellite parameter setting. SA Kim
Rev. 1.28 2014-03-19 Include AT Commands from RS232. Ronaldo
Rev. 1.29 2014-04-23 Include ST300H setting. Ronaldo
Rev. 1.30 2014-04-28 Add travel events zip report. SA Kim
Rev1.31 2014-05-19 Change copyright. HG. Park
Rev1.32 2014-10-20 Modified for Gabriel comments. HGPARK
Rev1.33 2014-11-04 Arranged document with Sam SA Kim
Rev 1.34 2014-11-13 Added related on driver pattern SA Kim
Rev 1.35 2014-11-28 Cleared table error SA Kim
Rev 1.35A 2014-12-05 Added 300V model SA Kim
Rev 1.35B 2014-12-17 Changed Event in3 type SA Kim
Rev 1.35C 2014-12-22 SA Kim
Zip Table
Rev 1.35D 2014-12-26 Changed ordering manner of the report fields for ST300A SA Kim
Deleted the commands relating to Shutdown
Rev 1.36 2014-12-30 Added STGPS Req. SE Park
Added Polygon geo-fence SA Kim
Added some Single commands..
Rev 1.37 2015-01-10 Clear errata HGpark.
Rev 1.38 2015-04-02 Change Idle to Parking and Active to Driving JK Kim
Rev 1.39 2015-05-01 Added Temperature Sensor function and description SE Park
Rev 1.40. 2015-05-06 Add Dont use software flow control, if use RS232. script in Chapter 4-3, 6-7, 6-8. JK Kim
Fix Chapter 6-5 ST300K explain.
Add script for Immobilizer2 in Chapter 9-1-2.
Rev 1.41 2015-05-26 Added input1 type Use Coin Machine in Chapter 4-3. JK Kim
Added input1 chattering time description in Chapter 4-3.
Added Coin Machine Parameter in Chapter 4-18.
Added STT Report field TOTAL_COIN in Chapter 6-1-1.
Added COI Report in Chapter 6-11.

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document


Doc. Title Author Page of Pages

ST300/340 OPERATION MANUAL LATAM HG.Park 168 of 168


Concerning Doc. No. Rev. Date

Features and How to set parameters 1.56 30 Nov. 2015

Rev 1.42 2015-06-16 Added input type TPS in ST300V. JK Kim


Added report field TPS IN and TPS OUT in STT, EMG, EVT, ALT report.
Rev 1.43. 2015-07-02 Added alert ID 78 for engine service maintenance. JK Kim
Added JSR(Journey Summary Report) report in Chapter 6-12.
Added Coin Machine Zip code in Chapter 6-11-2.
2015-07-09 Added ENGINE_SVE field in Alert Report normal. JK Kim.
Added ENGINE_SVE_SIGN and ENGINE_SVE fields in Alert Report zip code.
Rev 1.44 2015-07-17 Added ST300D description in Chapter 6-1, 6-2, 6-3, 6-4, 6-5, 6-9, 9-1. JK Kim
2015-07-31 Fixed document errors by issue list by SQA. JK Kim
Added Chapter 8-22.
Added note for SetVol in Chapter 8-9.
Rev 1.45 2015-08-04 Added description of the ST340R SE.Park
Fixed wrong example description.
Rev 1.46 2015-08-13 Fixed wrong description. SE.Park
Rev 1.47 2015-08-25 Fixed wrong pin assign of event cable HG.Park
Rev 1.48 2015-09-03 Added Chapter 6-13, 6-14, 6-15, 8-15 to DPA2. JK Kim
Added explain or example of DPA2 in Chapter 4-9, 6-1, 6-2, 6-3, 6-4.
Rev 1.49 2015-09-07 Fixed wrong description. JK Kim
Rev 1.50 2015-09-19 Fixed wrong description. SE.Park
Rev 1.51 2015-10-21 Added Appendices chapter. SE.Park
Rev 1.52 2015-11-10 Added TLS description in Chapter 4-3, 6-1, 6-2, 6-3, 6-4, 6-9. JK Kim
Added MAX_SPD field description in Chapter 6-1.
Added DPA2 Alert report sample in Chapter 6-4-1.
Moved to end of the STT, EVT, EMG, ALT report to OV_SP_RP, OV_SP_TIME,
SPD_2. AC, HB, SHARP. FORCE field.
2015-11-12 Fixed description errors to reported by SQA. JK Kim
Rev 1.53 2015-11-17 Fixed description errors to reported by SQA(Chapter 7-16). JK Kim
Rev 1.54 2015-11-24 Fixed description errors to reported by STGPS(Chapter 4-13, 4-15, 4-17, 6, 6-3-1, JK Kim
7-2, 7-4, 8-6).
Rev 1.55 2015-11-25 Added TPS_S1_IN, TPS_S1_OUT, TPS_S2_IN, TPS_S2_OUT fields JK Kim
description in Chapter 6-1, 6-2, 6-3, 6-4, 6-9.
Rev. 1.56 2015-11-30 Added protocols and descriptions for Omnicomm fuel sensor. DY Jeong

- End of the Document -

Suntech International Ltd. Confidential Document

Potrebbero piacerti anche